Free Shipping on Equipment & Parts orders of $200 or more! * Click for Restrictions

Have a question? 800-440-6723 International: 803-252-0100

English Se habla español
Parts › PartFinder › Advance SC750 / SC800 › Service manual
Form 56043150, Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16
Advance · Floor scrubber service manual

Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual

56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16164 pagesAdvance 56112000, 56112004, 56112006, 56112012, 56112013, 56112016, 56112018, 56112024, 56112028, 56112032, 56112780; Nilfisk 56112034, 56112035, 56112036
Before first use: charge the batteries overnight before you run the machine the first time.
Free to read, no account neededEvery page has its own linkPart numbers link to the part
SERVICE MANUAL

Advance: SC750, SC750 ST, SC800, SC800 ST / Nilfisk: SC800

Two photos of the machine: a Nilfisk SC800 on the left and an Advance SC750 on the right, both walk-behind disc floor scrubbers with the squeegee trailing at the rear
Nilfisk SC800 (left) and Advance SC750 (right)

Advance models: 56112000 (SC750-26D), 56112004 (SC750-28D), 56112006 (SC750-28C), 56112012 (SC750 ST-26D), 56112013 (SC750 ST-28C), 56112016 (SC800-28D), 56112018 (SC800-28C), 56112024 (SC800-32C), 56112028 (SC800-34D), 56112032 (SC800 ST-34D), 56112780 (SC70-28R)‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠‍‌‍‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‌​‌‌‌‌​⁠‌

Nilfisk models: 56112034 (SC800-71), 56112035 (SC800-86), 56112036 (SC800-71C)

11/10 Revised 12/16 Form Number 56043150

Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 1, used with permission. SES ref PF-SNQM-RXZL‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠‍‌‍‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‌​‌‌‌‌​⁠‌
Form Number 56043150Page 1 of 164
SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 2, used with permission. SES ref PF-VHM4-B5HA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‌​​‍‍⁠‌‍​⁠‌​‍⁠⁠​​‍‌‌‌
Form Number 56043150Page 2 of 164
SERVICE MANUAL
  • Options and accessories (75)
  • Recovery system (79)
  • Scrub system – cylindrical (86)
  • Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 3, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZETC-DXDF‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍​⁠‌​​⁠​​⁠⁠​​‌​⁠​‌‌​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 3 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
  • Scrub system, disc (102)
  • Scrub system, Rev (114)
  • Solution system (130)
  • Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 4, used with permission. SES ref PF-5N2Z-KZMU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​‌​‍‌‍‍‌‌​‌​​​‍‌⁠‍‌​​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 4 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
  • Squeegee system (137)
  • Wheel system non-traction (141)
  • Wheel system, traction (142)
  • Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 5, used with permission. SES ref PF-I4DK-A4XM‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​‍​​‌‍‌​⁠‍‍​‌‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍​‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 5 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    General information

    Service manual purpose and application

    This Service Manual is a resource for professional service technicians. It provides information for understanding how the machine operates, where components are located, basic troubleshooting, maintenance and mechanical service operations.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​​‍‌

    Pictures in this manual are of “prototype” machines. If a picture is slightly different than the machine you are working on, it is likely that an improvement was introduced.

    This manual covers the Nilfisk SC800 models as well as Advance SC750, SC800, SC750 ST and SC800 ST models. Each machine has as specific model number (part number) which can be found on its nameplate. The cover page of the manual lists each machine part number that the manual applies to. Compare the model number of the machine you are working on to the model numbers listed on the cover page to be sure you are using the correct manual.

    This manual often distinguishes between “ST” models and “Non-ST” models Model names that end in “ST” (SC 750 ST, SC800 ST) use palm drive switches on the drive handle and have toggle switches on the control panel. Models that do not end in “ST” (SC 750, SC 800) use a drive paddle and have solely membrane style switches on the control panel.

    In short This manual covers the Advance SC750, SC750 ST, SC800 and SC800 ST and the Nilfisk SC800. Match the part number on your machine's nameplate to the cover page before you use it. ST models have palm drive switches and toggle switches on the control panel, and non-ST models have a drive paddle and membrane switches.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​​‍‌
    Non-ST model: the operator control panel with membrane style switches and the drive paddle on the handle
    Non-ST model
    ST model: the control panel with three large toggle switches, and the drive handle with a palm drive switch on each side
    ST model
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 6, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZA6C-EMQ3‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 6 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Other reference manuals

    Nilfisk Models‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​‌‍⁠‍‌​‍‌‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍​‍‌

    • Instructions for Use – Form Number 56091000
    • Parts List – Form Number 56042542

    Advance Models

    • Instructions for Use – Form Number 56041820
    • Parts List – Form Number 56042535

    Conventions

    Forward, backward, front, rear, left or right are intended with reference to the operator’s position, that is to say in driving position with the hands on the handlebar.

    Transporting the machine

    CAUTION! Before transporting the machine on an open truck or trailer, make sure that . . .
    • The machine is tied down securely.
    • All access doors and covers are secured (tape and strap as needed).

    Towing

    CAUTION! If the machine must be towed or pushed, make sure the Key Switch is in the OFF position. Do not move the machine faster than a normal walking pace (2-3 mph, 3-5kph) and for short distances only. Note: Disconnecting the wheel drive motor wiring connector will make a disabled machine easier to push.

    Cautions and warnings

    Symbols

    Nilfisk-Advance uses the symbols below to signal potentially dangerous conditions. Read this information carefully and take the necessary steps to protect personnel and property.

    DANGER! Is used to warn of immediate hazards that will cause severe personal injury or death.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 7, used with permission. SES ref PF-CSJC-XHCU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​‌‍⁠‍‌​‍‌‌⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 7 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    WARNING! Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause severe personal injury.

    Is used to call attention to a situation that could cause minor personal injury or damage to the machine or other property.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‌‍‌‍⁠‍‌‍‍‌‍‌​​⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠

    Read all instructions before using.

    General safety instructions

    Specific Cautions and Warnings are included to warn you of potential danger of machine damage or bodily harm.

    WARNING!
    • This machine should only be used by properly trained and authorized persons.
    • While on ramps or inclines, avoid sudden stops when loaded. Avoid abrupt sharp turns. Use low speed down hills. Clean only while ascending (driving up) the ramp.
    • Keep sparks, flame and smoking materials away from batteries. Explosive gases are vented during normal operation.
    • Charging the batteries produces highly explosive hydrogen gas. Charge batteries only in well-ventilated areas away from open flame. Do not smoke while charging the batteries.
    • Remove all jewelry when working near electrical components.
    • Turn the key switch off (O) and disconnect the batteries before servicing electrical components.
    • Never work under a machine without safety blocks or stands to support the machine.
    • Do not dispense flammable cleaning agents, operate the machine on or near these agents, or operate in areas where flammable liquids exist.
    • Do not clean this machine with a pressure washer.
    • Do not operate this machine on ramps or inclines of more than a 2 percent gradient.
    • Only use the brushes provided with the appliance or those specified in the instruction manual. The use of other brushes may impair safety.
    CAUTION!
    • This machine is not approved for use on public paths or roads.
    • This machine is not suitable for picking up hazardous dust.
    • Use care when using scarifier discs and grinding stones. Advance will not be held responsible for any damage to floor surfaces caused by scarifiers or grinding stones.
    • When operating this machine, ensure that third parties, particularly children, are not endangered.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 8, used with permission. SES ref PF-VLNY-WSFV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‌‍‌‍⁠‍‌‍‍‌‍‌​​⁠‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 8 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    • Before performing any service function, carefully read all instructions pertaining to that function.
    • Do not leave the machine unattended without first turning the key switch off (O), removing the key and securing the machine.
    • Turn the key switch off (O) and remove the key, before changing the brushes, and before opening any access panels.
    • Take precautions to prevent hair, jewelry, or loose clothing from becoming caught in moving parts.
    • Use caution when moving this machine in below freezing temperature conditions. Any water in the solution or recovery tanks or in the hose lines could freeze, causing damage to valves and fittings. Flush with windshield washer fluid.
    • The batteries must be removed from the machine before the machine is scrapped. The disposal of the batteries should be safely done in accordance with your local environmental regulations.
    • Do not use on surfaces having a gradient exceeding that marked on the machine.
    • All doors and covers are to be positioned as indicated in the instruction manual before using the machine.

    General machine description

    The “SC” (SC750, SC800, SC75 ST and SC800 ST) machines are battery powered walk behind floor scrubbers designed to clean flat, hard surfaces. They are powered by a 24 volt battery pack. They have one controller that operates the scrub and vacuum functions and another that operates the drive system. They can be equipped with either a “Disc” scrub deck or a “Cylindrical” scrub deck.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍‌‍​‍⁠‌​​‌‌⁠‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‌⁠​‌

    Nameplate

    The nameplate contains important identification information which will be needed when ordering parts: Model (Name), Part No. (Part number of the machine which is often referred to as the “Model Number”), and Serial Number.

    Photo of the open battery compartment with an arrow pointing to the nameplate on the machine body
    Nameplate location
    Close-up of a nameplate showing Model, Part No., 24 V, Serial No. and Code fields and the Nilfisk-Advance logo
    Nameplate (prototype example)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 9, used with permission. SES ref PF-7337-DLCI‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍‌‍​‍⁠‌​​‌‌⁠‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‌⁠​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 9 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Know your machine

    Control panel – SC750 and SC800 (membrane switch control panel)

    These machines use a control panel with an LCD display in the center. See the following sections for switch identification, LCD Display explanations and Indicator Light explanations.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠‍​​⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌​

    Photo of the membrane switch control panel with labels: Solution Increase Switch, Display Panel, Scrub Pressure Increase Switch, Brush Remove Switch (Disc Decks Only), Scrub ON/OFF Switch, Vacuum/Wand Switch, Solution ON/OFF Switch, Scrub Pressure Decrease Switch, Key Switch (Main Power), Solution Decrease Switch, Detergent ON/OFF Switch, Burst of Power Switch
    Membrane switch control panel

    Switch identification

    • Key Switch (Main Power) - Turns “ON” the power to the control panel. “O” is “OFF” and “I” is “ON”.
    • Solution ON/OFF Switch –Starts or stops the flow of cleaning solution to the floor.
    • Solution Increase Switch – Increases the amount of cleaning solution flow.
    • Solution Decrease Switch – Reduces the amount of cleaning solution flow.
    • Detergent ON/OFF Switch – Starts or stops the flow of detergent on models with the EcoFlex detergent mixing system.
    • Display Panel – Provides additional machine operation information.
    • Scrub ON/OFF Switch – Raises and lowers the scrub head assembly. Enables/disables the vacuum motor, solution flow and the scrub motors.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 10, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZSTC-5LQL‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠‍​​⁠​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 10 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    • Scrub Pressure Increase Switch – Extends the scrub head actuator to apply additional scrubbing pressure on the floor (Disc models only).
    • Scrub Pressure Decrease Switch – Retracts the scrub head actuator to the normal scrub pressure position (Disc models only).
    • Burst of Power Switch – Temporarily provides additional scrubbing power (For use with optional detergent mixing system).
    • Brush Remove Switch (Disc Decks Only) – Initiates a sequence to run and suddenly stop the brush motors to remove the discs.
    • Vacuum/Wand Switch – Starts and stops the vacuum motor.

    LCD display

    The LCD display with callouts F1 to F6 (hour meter, solution tank level, fault code, detergent flask, detergent ratio, battery), and two separate warning screens F7 (recovery tank full) and F8 (battery low)
    LCD display indicators F1 to F8
    • F1 Hour Meter
    • F2 Solution Tank Level Indicator
    • F3 Fault Codes
    • F4 Detergent Indicator (if so equipped)
    • F5 Detergent Ratio Indicator (If so equipped)
    • F6 Battery Indicator
    • F7 Recovery Tank FULL Indicator
    • F8 Battery Low Indicator
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 11, used with permission. SES ref PF-7MLY-QYMS‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‍‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​‌‍‌​​​​​‍‌‌⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 11 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Indicator lights

    All indicator lights illuminate for 2 seconds when the key is first turned on.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍​‌‍‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠

    IndicatorNameDescription
    Solution switch icon: a faucet with three indicator lights stacked beside it
    Solution flow indicators
    Solution Flow Indicators
    • No flow = None lit
    • Low flow = Bottom one lit
    • Medium flow = Bottom two lit
    • High flow = All lit
    Scrub switch with plus and minus buttons and a brush icon, with two indicator lights at its right
    Scrub pressure indicators
    Scrub Pressure Indicators
    • Regular Scrub Pressure = Bottom one lit
    • Extreme Scrub Pressure = Both lit
    Vacuum switch icon with an indicator light at its upper right corner
    Vacuum indicator
    Vacuum Indicator
    • Vacuum on = On
    • Vacuum off = Off
    • Time Delay before shut off = Flashing
    Detergent switch icon, a flask, with an indicator light at its upper right corner
    Detergent indicator
    Detergent Indicator
    • Detergent on = On
    • Detergent off = Off
    Burst of Power switch icon, a green double tree arrow, with an indicator light at its upper right corner
    Burst of Power indicator
    Burst of Power Indicator
    • Switch disabled = Off
    • Switch enabled = On - Green
    • Burst of Power = Flashing - Yellow
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 12, used with permission. SES ref PF-XRGV-2Y5M‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌‍⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍​‌‍‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 12 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Control panel – SC750 ST and SC800 ST (toggle switch control panel)

    These machines use a control panel with 3 large toggle switches and do not have an LCD display. See the following sections for switch identification and Indicator Light explanations.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‌⁠‌​⁠​⁠⁠​​‌‌‌​​​⁠​

    Photo of the toggle switch control panel with labels: Scrub Switch (center), Vacuum/Wand Switch (left), Solution Switch (right) and Key Switch (Main Power)
    Toggle switch control panel

    Switch identification

    • Key Switch (Main Power) - Turns “ON” the power to the control panel. “O” is “OFF” and “I” is “ON”.
    • Solution Switch (Low, Medium & High) – Pressing the switch forward turns on or increases the flow of cleaning solution to the floor. Pressing the switch backward turns off or decreases the flow of cleaning solution to the floor.(Note: Solution will not flow until the machine begins to move.)
    • Vacuum/Wand Switch – Pressing the switch forward turns on the vacuum motor. Pressing the switch backward turns the vacuum motor off.
    • Scrub Switch
      • Cylindrical Models – Pressing the switch forward lowers the scrub deck and enables all scrub functions. Pressing the switch backward disables all scrub functions and raises the scrub deck.
      • Disc Models – When first pressed forward all scrub functions are enabled. If in the normal scrub pressure mode already, pressing the switch forward will extend the deck actuator to the “extreme” scrub pressure mode which also increases the solution flow. When operating in the extreme scrub pressure mode, pressing the switch backward will retract the deck actuator to the normal scrub mode which also decreases the solution flow. When operating in the normal scrub pressure mode, pressing the switch backward disables all scrub functions and raises the scrub deck.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 13, used with permission. SES ref PF-5YUU-OGIM‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‌⁠‌​⁠​⁠⁠​​‌‌‌​​​⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 13 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Indicator lights

    All indicator lights illuminate for 2 seconds when the key is first turned on.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍​‍‌​⁠‌⁠‌‍‍‌‌​‍⁠‍​​​‍​

    IndicatorNameDescription
    Solution toggle switch with a faucet icon above it and three indicator lights beside it
    Solution flow indicators
    Solution Flow Indicators
    • No flow = None lit
    • Low flow = Bottom one lit
    • Medium flow = Bottom two lit
    • High flow = All lit
    Scrub toggle switch with a brush icon above it and two indicator lights beside it
    Scrub pressure indicators
    Scrub Pressure Indicators
    • Regular Scrub Pressure = Bottom one lit
    • Extreme Scrub Pressure = Both lit
    Vacuum toggle switch with a vacuum icon above it and one indicator light beside it
    Vacuum indicator
    Vacuum Indicator
    • Vacuum on = On
    • Vacuum off = Off
    • Time Delay before shut off = Flashing
    Battery indicator: a battery symbol with a rising wedge and three indicator lights
    Battery indicator
    Battery Indicator
    • Shows current battery condition
      • Green = Full
      • Yellow = Medium
      • Red = Low
      • Flashing Red = Low Voltage Cut Out Mode
    Fault code indicator: a yellow warning triangle and manual symbol with an indicator light at the right
    Fault code indicator
    Fault Code Indicator
    • Normal Operation
      • Off = No Codes
      • Flashing = Code display
    • Will light up if the key is switched on while charging the battery.
    • Displays the currently selected setting when in hidden menu operations.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 14, used with permission. SES ref PF-7SSV-LNNV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍​‍‌​⁠‌⁠‌‍‍‌‌​‍⁠‍​​​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 14 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Machine specifications – SC750 and SC750 ST

    See other system chapters for specifications not listed here.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠​​⁠​‍⁠‌​‍‌⁠​‍‌⁠‌​⁠‍‌⁠

    Model name/model numberUnitSC750
    SC 750 ST
    Machine VoltageVolts24V
    Battery CapacityAh242, 310, 312
    Solution Tank CapacityGal/L21.33/80.7
    Recovery Tank Capacity (Static)Gal/L21.61/78.0
    Sound Pressure Level (IEC 60704-1)dB(A)61 dB(A)
    Gross Weight (standard machine with charger; w/ full solution tank, empty recovery tank and heaviest batteries installed)lbs. / kg942 lbs. (427.3 kg)
    Net Weight (machine w/o options, batteries or removable brushes; w/empty solution and recovery tanks)lbs. / kg347 lbs (157.4 kg)
    Static Wheel Pressure (right front)PSI/N/mm259.08 psi / .407 N/mm2
    Static Wheel Pressure (left front)PSI/N/mm260.1 psi /.414 N/mm2
    Static Wheel Pressure (center rear)PSI/N/mm2287.6 psi (1.983 N/mm2)
    Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1)m/s20.3 ft/s2 (.09 m/s2)
    Gradeability - Scrubbing and Transport (Full)14.9% (8.5°)
    Gradeability -Trailer Ramp (Empty)17.6% (10.0°)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 15, used with permission. SES ref PF-SKJS-ZIQM‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠​​⁠​‍⁠‌​‍‌⁠​‍‌⁠‌​⁠‍‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 15 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Machine specifications – SC800 and SC800 ST

    See other system chapters for specifications not listed here.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‌‍‍‍​‌⁠‌‌⁠‍​‍​‍​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠

    Model name/model numberUnitSC 800
    SC800 ST
    Voltage, BatteriesV24V
    Battery CapacityAh242, 310, 312
    Solution Tank CapacityGal/L24.69 gal (93.5 l)
    Recovery Tank Capacity (Static)Gal/L26.84 gal (101.6 l)
    Sound Pressure Level (IEC 60704-1)dB(A)61
    Gross Weight (standard machine; w/full solution tank, empty recovery tank and E.U. batteries installed)lbs / kg996 lbs (451.77 kg)
    Net Weight (standard 28” disc machine w/o options, batteries or removable brushes; w/empty solution and recovery tanks)lbs. / kg363 lbs (169.2 kg)
    Net Weight (standard 34” disc machine w/o options, batteries; w/empty solution and recovery tanks)lbs. / kg365 lbs (170.1 kg)
    Net Weight (standard cylindrical machine w/o options, batteries or removable brushes; w/empty solution and recovery tanks)lbs. / kg373 lbs (173.7 kg)
    Static Wheel Pressure (right front)psi N/mm271.0 psi / .490 N/mm2
    Static Wheel Pressure (left front)psi N/mm266.6 psi /.459 N/mm2
    Static Wheel Pressure (center rear)psi N/mm2287.6 psi (1.983 N/mm2)
    Vibrations at the Hand Controls (ISO 5349-1)m/s20.3 ft/s2 (.09 m/s2)
    Gradeability Transport2% (1.15°)
    Gradeability Cleaning2% (1.15°)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 16, used with permission. SES ref PF-KKW5-37GN‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‌‍‍‍​‌⁠‌‌⁠‍​‍​‍​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 16 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Machine maintenance

    Maintenance itemDailyWeeklyMonthlyYearly
    Charge BatteriesX
    Check/Clean Tanks & HosesX
    Check/Clean/Rotate the Brushes/PadsX
    Check/Clean the SqueegeeX
    Check/Clean Vacuum Shut-Off FloatX
    Empty/Clean Debris Tray In Recovery TankX
    Clean Hopper on Cylindrical SystemX
    Check Each Battery Cell(s) Water Level (does not apply to gel cell batteries)X
    Inspect Scrub Housing SkirtsX
    Inspect and clean Solution FilterX
    Clean Solution Manifolds on Cylindrical SystemX
    Purge Detergent System (EcoFlex only)X
    Lubricate the MachineX
    *Check Carbon BrushesX
    Replace Isolators (REV only)X

    Note: See the individual machine system sections for maintenance information.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌‍

    * Check Carbon Brushes.

    • *Check vacuum motor carbon brushes (Qty 2) once a year or after 300 operating hours.
    • *Check brush and wheel drive motor(s) carbon brushes (Qty 4 per motor) once a year or after 500 operating hours.
    • *The original (new) length of each carbon brush is 1 in (25.4 mm) on all 24 volt machine models’ brush and wheel drive motors.
    • *All motors: Replace carbon brushes when shorter than 3/8 in (9.5 mm) to obtain the same motor efficiency as new brushes.

    Important

    Motor damage resulting from failure to service the carbon brushes is not covered under warranty. See the Limited Warranty Statement.

    In short Charging, tank, brush, squeegee, float and debris tray checks are daily; battery water, skirts and the solution filter are weekly; lubrication is monthly. Carbon brushes are checked yearly: vacuum motor brushes after 300 operating hours and brush and wheel drive motor brushes after 500, and any motor's brushes are replaced when shorter than 3/8 in (9.5 mm).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌‍
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 17, used with permission. SES ref PF-VFTT-CFEU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌‌‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 17 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Lubricating the machine

    Once a month, apply light machine oil to lubricate the:‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‍​‌⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠​‌⁠‍‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍

    • General Pivot Points for the Squeegee Linkage (A).
    • Squeegee mount angle adjustment knob threads (B).
    • Squeegee Tool end wheels (C).
    • General Pivot Points for the Brush Linkage (D).
    • Scrub deck bumper wheels.

    Once per quarter, grease the following

    • Rear Caster Wheel Swivels (E).
    WARNING! Turn the key switch off and disconnect the batteries before servicing the machine.
    Drawing of the machine chassis and scrub deck with lubrication points labeled A (squeegee linkage pivots), B (squeegee angle adjustment knob), C (squeegee tool end wheels), D (brush linkage pivots) and E (rear caster wheel swivel)
    Lubrication points A to E
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 18, used with permission. SES ref PF-WMB2-YM6Q‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‍​‌⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠​‌⁠‍‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 18 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Chassis system

    Functional description

    The chassis is made up of heavy gauge steel and supports the drive transaxle, caster wheel, brush deck, squeegee assembly and machine body.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠‍⁠‍‍‍‌​‍‌‌‍⁠​‍‌​⁠‌‌‌

    In short The chassis is the heavy gauge steel frame that carries the drive transaxle, caster wheel, brush deck, squeegee assembly and machine body.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠‍⁠‍‍‍‌​‍‌‌‍⁠​‍‌​⁠‌‌‌
    Drawing of the bare steel chassis frame
    Chassis
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 19, used with permission. SES ref PF-JVRI-G733‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠‍⁠‍‍‍‌​‍‌‌‍⁠​‍‌​⁠‌‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 19 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Control system

    Functional description

    There are two controllers on the machine, a Main Machine Controller and a Drive Motor Controller.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠​‍⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‍

    The Main Machine Controller operates the floor cleaning functions of scrub, solution and vacuum based on operator requests and other inputs. It is located directly behind the operator control panel. It is capable of storing and displaying many fault codes. In addition to fault codes, it supports special modes of operation called “Programming Mode” and “Service Test Mode”. The programming mode is used primarily for “telling” the controller how the machine is equipped so that it can operate accordingly. The service test mode is a powerful and convenient diagnostic feature that allows a technician to request specific outputs to operate regardless of current inputs.

    The Drive Motor Controller (Speed Controller) operates the drive motor that propels the machine based on operator requests. (See the section on Wheel System, Traction for more information)

    In short The Main Machine Controller runs scrub, solution and vacuum and sits directly behind the operator control panel. It also stores fault codes and has a Programming Mode and a Service Test Mode. The Drive Motor Controller runs the drive motor that propels the machine.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠​‍⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‍
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 20, used with permission. SES ref PF-T6T7-QWOC‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​⁠​‍⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 20 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Component locations

    • Electrical Panel Cover
    • Circuit Breaker Mounting Plate
    • Control Switch Interface Panel
    • Main Machine Controller
    Photo of the machine rear and operator console with labels: Control Switch Interface Panel, Main Machine Controller (behind cover) with an inset photo of the circuit board, Electrical Panel Cover and Circuit Breaker Mounting Plate
    Component locations
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 21, used with permission. SES ref PF-GLTE-DIBO‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‍‌​‌​‍‌‍​‍⁠‌‌‌‌​‌‍⁠​⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 21 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Troubleshooting

    In shortOn SC750 and SC800 models the fault code shows on the LCD display. On SC750 ST and SC800 ST models it flashes out as a two-digit blink code on the fault indicator light. The table on pages 22 through 25 lists each code, what sets it and what to check. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you get stuck.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍⁠​‌‌⁠​‍​​

    Fault codes

    SC750 and SC800 models - Any error codes detected by the Main Machine Controller will be displayed on the LCD display as they occur.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍⁠​‌‌⁠​‍​​

    LCD display of an SC750 or SC800 showing hour meter 0001.42 with a red box around a wrench icon and the fault code 30 at the top right
    Fault code on the LCD display

    SC750 ST and SC800 ST models – Active faults are displayed as a blink code on the fault code indicator light. The code will be a two digit code. The first digit will flash out followed by a short pause. Then the second digit will flash out followed by a long pause. (On, short pause, On, On, long pause is a code 1,2)

    Rocker switch control panel indicator strip with a warning triangle, a manual symbol and the round fault code indicator light outlined in red
    Fault code indicator light (ST models)

    If multiple codes are present, the codes will appear in order until all have been displayed. Then the sequence will repeat again.

    Fault code table

    For SC750 and SC800 models, refer to the column “LCD Display Code”. For SC750 ST and SC800 ST models, refer to the “ST Blink Code” column.

    LCD display codeST blink codeCode definitionExplanation / code setting conditions / flash indicator / disables / check
    3#1,1Drive Motor Controller Fault

    The Drive Motor Controller has seen a problem and has set a “Trip Code”. Trip codes are grouped into “Trip Types” (On “Non-ST” models, count the Detergent LED flashes to obtain the specific Drive system “Trip Type” value. On “ST” models, count the High Solution Flow LED flashes. See the Wheel System, Traction chapter, Troubleshooting section for additional information)

    Disables: Detergent, Solution, Brush Motors.

    4#1,2Scrub Deck Lift Actuator Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 5.8 amps or more.

    Disables: Brush Head Actuator.

    Check for shorted actuator, mechanical binding of actuator linkage, shorted wiring.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 22, used with permission. SES ref PF-XCUM-IYCQ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍⁠​‌‌⁠​‍​​
    Form Number 56043150Page 22 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    LCD display codeST blink codeCode definitionExplanation / code setting conditions / flash indicator / disables / check
    5#1,3Brush Motor Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 60 amps or more.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍‌​‍⁠⁠​​‌⁠‍‍‌‌⁠​​‍​‌⁠⁠

    Check for shorted motor, mechanical binding of motor shaft, current sense wire connections, ground connections.

    7#1,4Vacuum Motor Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 25 amps or more.

    Check for shorted motor, current sense wire connections, ground connections.

    8#1,5Solution Solenoid Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 0.7 amps or more.

    Check for shorted solenoid winding, shorted wiring.

    9#2,1Vacuum Contactor Coil Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 0.1 amps or more.

    Check for shorted contactor winding, shorted wiring.

    10#2,2Brush Contactor Coil Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 0.7 amps or more.

    Check for shorted contactor winding, shorted wiring.

    11#(N/A)Detergent Pump Circuit Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed.

    Check for shorted pump winding, shorted wiring.

    12#(N/A)Brush Remove Contactor Coil Over Current

    Excessive current draw was sensed. Code sets at approximately 0.1 amps or more.

    Check for shorted contactor winding, shorted wiring.

    30#2,3Solution Solenoid Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has turned the solution solenoid circuit on but it is not sensing any current flow. (Senses ≤ 20 mAmps for 5 seconds).

    Check for open solenoid winding, open wiring.

    31#2,4Brush Motor Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has energized the Brush Contactor but it is not sensing any current flow through the brush motor ground circuit for at least 5 seconds. (Senses ≤ 4 Amps for 5 seconds and code 35 is not active)

    Check Motor, Contactor contacts, Wiring.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 23, used with permission. SES ref PF-2IDR-SWQR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍‌​‍⁠⁠​​‌⁠‍‍‌‌⁠​​‍​‌⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 23 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    LCD display codeST blink codeCode definitionExplanation / code setting conditions / flash indicator / disables / check
    32#2,5Scrub Deck Lift Actuator Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller is trying to move the actuator but it is not sensing any current flow. (Senses ≤ 100 m Amps for 5 seconds).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌​‍​​‌‍​‌‌‍​​‌‍‌⁠​‌​‍⁠

    Check Actuator, wiring.

    33#3,1Vacuum Motor Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has energized the Vacuum Contactor but it is not sensing any current flow through the vacuum motor ground circuit for at least 5 seconds. (Senses ≤ 3 Amps for 5 second and Fault Code 36 is not active)

    Check motor, wiring.

    35#3,2Brush Contactor Coil Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has attempted to energize the Brush Contactor but it is not seeing any current flow. (Senses ≤ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds).

    Check for open Contactor winding, wiring.

    36#3,3Vacuum Contactor Coil Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has attempted to energize the Vacuum Contactor but it is not seeing any current flow. if (Senses ≤ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds)

    Check for open Contactor winding, wiring.

    37#(N/A)Detergent Pump Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has energized the detergent pump but it is not sensing any current flow. (Senses ≤ 30 m Amps for 5 seconds).

    Check for open pump winding, wiring.

    38#(N/A)Brush Remove Contactor Coil Circuit Open

    The Main Machine Controller has attempted to energize the Brush Remove Contactor but it is not seeing any current flow. (Senses ≤ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds)

    Check for open Contactor winding, wiring.

    60#3,4Brush Motor Contactor Stuck Closed

    The Main Machine Controller is sensing current flow through the Brush Motor ground circuit when it has not energized the Brush Motor Contactor (Senses ≥ 4 Amps for 5 seconds and Fault Code 63 is not active)

    Check for “welded” contacts.

    61#3,5Vacuum Motor Contactor Stuck Closed

    The Main Machine Controller is sensing current flow through the Vacuum Motor ground circuit when it has not energized the Vacuum Motor Contactor (Senses ≥ 3 Amps for 5 seconds and Fault Code 64 and 65 are not active)

    Check for “welded” contacts.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 24, used with permission. SES ref PF-KSKX-7YJ7‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌​‍​​‌‍​‌‌‍​​‌‍‌⁠​‌​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 24 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    LCD display codeST blink codeCode definitionExplanation / code setting conditions / flash indicator / disables / check
    62#4,1Solution Solenoid Circuit Stuck On

    The Main Machine controller is sensing current flow through its internal switch for the solution solenoid circuit when it has not requested that the switch be turned on. (Senses ≥ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‍​​⁠‍​⁠⁠​⁠⁠‍‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌​⁠

    63#4,2Brush Contactor Coil Circuit Stuck On

    The Main Machine controller is sensing current flow through its internal switch for the Brush Contactor Coil circuit when it has not requested that the switch be turned on. (Senses ≥ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds).

    64#4,3Vacuum Contactor Coil Circuit Stuck On

    The Main Machine controller is sensing current flow through its internal switch for the Vacuum Contactor Coil circuit when it has not requested that the switch be turned on. (Senses ≥ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds).

    65#(N/A)Brush Remove Contactor Coil Circuit Stuck On

    The Main Machine controller is sensing current flow through its internal switch for the Brush Remove Contactor Coil circuit when it has not requested that the switch be turned on. (Senses ≥ 20 m Amps for 5 seconds).

    70#4,4Corrupt Communication From On-Board Battery Charger

    The Battery Charger did not properly repeat the charging profile message back to the Main Machine Controller.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 25, used with permission. SES ref PF-B4WV-HNOP‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‍​​⁠‍​⁠⁠​⁠⁠‍‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 25 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Service test mode

    In shortService test mode lets you make the Main Machine Controller turn on outputs such as the brush motors directly, and check that it sees certain inputs, without the other running conditions being met. The procedure is different on ST models (rocker switches, below) and non-ST models (membrane switches, page 27). Turn the key off to leave the mode.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‌‌‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​‌​‍⁠‌‍‍‍‍

    Some outputs (like the scrub brush motors) are only turned on when other conditions are met, such as when the machine is moving. It can be difficult to check for voltage to the scrub brush motors while the machine is moving. Also, if voltage is not present, it leaves in question what other conditions may not have been met yet. The Service Test Mode solves these problems for the technician. In Service Test Mode the technician can request that the Main Machine Controller ignore all other conditions and directly turn on the scrub brush motors as well as other outputs. Service Test mode can also be used to verify that certain inputs are seen by the controller. The concept is the same for all models but the procedure is very different depending on whether you are working on an” ST” model (control panel with rocker switches – SC750 ST and SC800 ST) or a “non-ST” model (control panel with membrane switches – SC750 and SC800). See appropriate sections below.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‌‌‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​‌​‍⁠‌‍‍‍‍

    Service test mode – SC750 ST and SC800 ST models (control panel with rocker switches)

    To enter the service test mode: (Start with the battery charger unplugged and the key off)

    1. Hold all three switches (Vacuum, Scrub and Solution) in the up (forward) position while turning the key on.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: all three pointing up (forward)
    Rocker switch positions
    1. Wait approximately 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then turn off. The low solution flow indicator light should remain on to confirm that you are in the service test mode.

    Now that you are in service test mode, you can request that the controller operate the various outputs and verify certain inputs via the indicator light operation. If a fault occurs the Fault LED will display the fault.

    To exit the service test mode: Turn the Key Switch off.

    Output tests

    Brush Deck Lift Actuator – Press the Scrub Switch forward to move the actuator downward to the next position. Watch for the actuator to move. Press the Scrub Switch backward to move the actuator up one position. The Scrub Indicator LEDs indicate the current actuator position. Neither LED is ON when deck is raised, lower LED is ON when deck is at low scrub pressure, both are on for high pressure. Machines with disc scrub decks have three positions while cylindrical decks have only two. Note: If the switch inputs are not reporting correct information, the controller will not understand the current actuator position and will not attempt to move the actuator.

    Solution Solenoid – Press the Solution Switch forward to cycle the solution solenoid on and off. The high solution flow indicator will be on while in the test mode. Listen for the Solenoid to click on and off. Press the Solution Switch forward again to stop cycling the solenoid.

    Brush Motor Contactor – Press the Solution Switch backward to energize the brush motor contactor. The medium solution flow indicator will be ON when energizing the contactor. Listen for the contactor to click and look to see if the brushes are rotating. Press the Solution Switch backward again to de-energize the contactor.

    Vacuum Motor Relay – Press the Vacuum Switch forward to energize the Vacuum Motor Relay. The Vacuum Indicator will be ON when energizing the relay. The vacuum motor should come ON. Press the Vacuum Switch backward to de-energize the relay.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 26, used with permission. SES ref PF-AW7V-SI3H‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‍‌‌‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠​‌​‍⁠‌‍‍‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 26 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Input tests

    Speed Control Forward/Reverse Signal –The yellow Battery LED turns on when in the service test mode whenever the speed controller tells the Main Machine Controller that it is attempting to drive the machine either forward or reverse. This is useful when diagnosing a no drive problem. If the light comes on when you attempt to drive the machine forward, it means that the Drive Controller has seen the request and responded to it.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​​​‍‌‍‌​‌​‌​​​​‌‌⁠‍​‌

    Speed Control Reverse Signal – The green Battery LED turns on when in the service test mode whenever the speed controller tells the Main Machine Controller that it is attempting to drive the machine in reverse.

    Service test mode – SC750 and SC 800 models (control panel with membrane switches)

    To enter the service test mode: (Start with the battery charger unplugged and the key off)

    1. Press and hold the scrub on/off switch and vacuum/wand switch together.
    Hand on the membrane switch control panel with two fingers pressing the scrub on/off switch and the vacuum/wand switch, key switch at the lower right
    Hold the scrub on/off and vacuum/wand switches
    1. While holding both switches, turn the main power key switch to the on position.
    2. Continue to hold both switches about 3 seconds until the display shows “Programming Options”, then release the switches.
    LCD display reading PROGRAM OPTIONS, 1. DECK TYPE
    Programming Options display
    1. Press the solution decrease button until you see “SERVICE TEST MODE” then press the solution on/off switch to enter the Service Test Mode. (Note: Turn Key Switch off to exit mode).
    LCD display reading PROGRAM OPTIONS, 15. SERVICE TEST MODE
    Service Test Mode display

    Now that you are in service test mode, you can request that the controller operate the various outputs and verify certain inputs via the LCD display. If any faults occur during testing, they will be displayed as well.

    Output tests

    Brush Deck Lift Actuator – Press the Scrub Increase Switch to move the actuator downward to the next position. Watch for the actuator to move. Press the Scrub Decrease Switch to move the actuator up one position. The LCD display for “DECK” will show “On” when the controller is trying to move the actuator and “Off” when it is not. Machines with disc scrub decks have three positions while cylindrical decks have only two. Note: If the switch inputs are not reporting correct information, the controller will not understand the current actuator position and will not attempt to move the actuator.

    Brush Remove Contactor (Relay) – Press the Brush Remove Switch to energize the brush remove relay. (During this test the Brush Motor Contactor will be de-energized) Listen closely for the relay to click. (It is a soft click. It won’t be heard in a noisy room.) Press the switch again to de-energize the relay. The LCD display for “BREM” will show “On” when the controller is trying to energize the relay and “Off” when it is not.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 27, used with permission. SES ref PF-ABLR-TZDO‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​​​​‍‌‍‌​‌​‌​​​​‌‌⁠‍​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 27 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Solution Solenoid – Press the Solution Switch to cycle the solution solenoid on and off. Listen for the Solenoid to click on and off. Press the switch again to stop cycling the solenoid. The LCD display for “SOL” will show “On” as long as the test mode is running; that is when the controller is trying to cycle the solenoid both on and off. The LCD display for “SOL” will show “Off” when the test mode is ended.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠​​‍‍‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍​‌​‍

    Brush Motor Contactor – Press the Scrub On/Off Switch to energize the brush motor contactor. Listen for the contactor to click and look to see if the brushes are rotating. Press the switch again to de-energize the contactor. The LCD display for “BR” will show “On” when the controller is trying to energize the contactor and “Off” when it is not.

    Vacuum Motor Relay – Press the Vacuum/Wand Switch to energize the Vacuum Motor Relay. The vacuum motor should come on. Press the switch again to de-energize the relay. The LCD display for “VAC” will show “On” when the controller is trying to energize the relay and “Off” when it is not.

    Detergent Pump – Press the Detergent On/Off Switch to cycle the detergent pump on and off. Listen for the pump to operate. Press the switch again to stop cycling the pump. The LCD display for “CP” will show “On” as long as the test mode is running; that is when the controller is trying to cycle the pump both on and off. The LCD display for “CP” will show “Off” when the test mode is ended.

    Input tests

    When in the service test mode the LCD display can be used to validate certain inputs.

    Battery Voltage – The LCD will display the battery voltage seen by the Main Machine Controller when in the Service test mode.

    Service test mode LCD with the top line 24.71 (battery voltage) outlined in red, then SPD:REV, SOL:OFF and VAC:OFF
    Battery voltage in service test mode

    Speed Control Forward/Reverse Signal AND Reverse Signal – The Main Machine controller interprets these two signals that it receives from the Drive Motor Controller and displays the information on the LCD.

    • OFF = Neutral
    • FWD = Forward
    • REV = Reverse

    Move the drive paddle in all three directions. If all 3 values are displayed correctly both of these inputs are working correctly.

    Service test mode LCD with the SPD:REV line outlined in red above SOL:OFF and VAC:OFF, battery voltage 24.71 on the top line
    Speed control signal on the LCD
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 28, used with permission. SES ref PF-JZWT-FQBC‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠‌⁠​​‍‍‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍​‌​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 28 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Programming options – SC750 ST and SC800 ST models (control panel with rocker switches)

    In shortEach program option on ST models is entered by holding a particular combination of rocker switches while turning the key on. The Scrub Deck Type and Battery Charger Selection options are mandatory: they must be set any time the Main Machine Controller is replaced, or the machine will not operate as it should.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌⁠‍⁠​‌⁠⁠​⁠⁠​​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​⁠‌

    Main Machine Controller special program options allow the service repairperson to match the control board to the specific model equipment and to user preferences. They also allow adjustments to some machine functions, and provide a way to see the controller’s revision level. On ST models each program option mode is accessed by pressing a specific configuration of buttons while turning the key on.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌⁠‍⁠​‌⁠⁠​⁠⁠​​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​⁠‌

    Mandatory program options

    These options are used to “inform” the Main Machine Controller how the machine is equipped. They must be set anytime the Main Machine Controller is replaced and they must be set correctly for the machine to operate as it should.

    Scrub Deck Type – There are 3 scrub deck options. This function configures the control unit current settings, flow rate settings, and scrub pressure settings for each of the scrub deck types.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum, scrub and solution switches backward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum down, scrub down, solution down (all backward)
    Rocker switch positions

    The Regular Scrub Pressure and Heavy Scrub Pressure Indicators will remain on and the fault indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = 28 Inch Cylindrical Brushes
    • 2 blinks = 26 Inch Disc Brushes
    • 3 blinks = 34 Inch Disc Brushes

    Battery Charger Selection –This function is used to inform the Main Machine Controller whether or not the machine is equipped with the optional S.P.E. on-board battery charger (The S.P.E charger was used on early machines. Later machines use the Delta-Q IC650 battery charger). It is also used to inform the controller of what kind of batteries the machine is equipped with. The Main Machine Controller will request a specific charging profile from the S.P.E battery charger to match the batteries.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the scrub and solution switches backward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum no arrow (not held), scrub down, solution down (scrub and solution backward)
    Rocker switch positions

    The red battery Indicator will remain on and the fault indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = Not equipped with on-board charger
    • 2 blinks = On-board charger with WET 25A batteries (Use with 242 AH WET Batteries 56206079 or 310 AH WET Batteries 56391391)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 29, used with permission. SES ref PF-4D35-JXI7‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌⁠‍⁠​‌⁠⁠​⁠⁠​​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 29 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    • 3 blinks = On-board charger with AGM DISCOVER 25A batteries (Use with 312 AH AGM Batteries 56315959)
    • 4 blinks = On-board charger with GEL EXIDE 25A batteries
    • 5 blinks = On-board charger with GEL-AGM 25A batteries
    • 6 blinks = On-board charger with WET 15A batteries
    • 7 blinks = On-board charger with GEL-AGM 15A batteries

    Additional program options

    The following options can be used by the technician or to set user preferences.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​‌⁠⁠⁠​​‍‌​​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠

    Low Voltage Cut Out Selection –The purpose of the low battery voltage cutout function is to help prolong battery life. The scrub deck will be raised and the brush motors, vacuum motor, and solution solenoid valve will turn OFF automatically and cease to function when the batteries discharge to the selected cutout level. The cutout level is adjustable between two settings. The standard setting (wet cell/lead acid) is 20.55 volts and alternate setting (AGM) is 21.75 volts.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and scrub switches backward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum down, scrub down, solution no arrow (vacuum and scrub backward)
    Rocker switch positions

    The yellow Battery Indicator will remain on and the fault indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = Wet Battery 80%, 20.55V
    • 2 blinks = Maintenance Free Battery 70%, 21.75V

    Lock Out Brush Pressure - It is possible to lock out either brush pressure setting: Low or High. During normal operation, the brush pressure that is locked out will not be able to be selected.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and solution switches backward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum down, scrub no arrow, solution down (vacuum and solution backward)
    Rocker switch positions

    The green Battery Indicator will remain on and the fault indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = No pressure setting locked out.
    • 2 blinks = Low pressure setting locked out.
    • 3 blinks = High pressure setting locked out.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 30, used with permission. SES ref PF-U2CP-L65N‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​‌⁠⁠⁠​​‍‌​​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 30 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Lock Out Solution Flow Rate - It is possible to lock out any one or more of the solution flow rate settings. During normal operation, the flow rate(s) that are locked out will not be able to be selected.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​⁠‍‌‌‌⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‌​‌‍‌‍​‍‌‌

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and solution switches forward and the scrub switch backwards, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum up, scrub down, solution up
    Rocker switch positions

    The Vacuum Indicator will remain on and the Fault Indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = No flow rate locked out.
    • 2 blinks = Low flow rate locked out.
    • 3 blinks = Medium flow rate locked out.
    • 4 blinks = High flow rate locked out.
    • 5 blinks = Low and medium flow rates locked out.
    • 6 blinks = Low and high flow rates locked out.
    • 7 blinks = Medium and high flow rates locked out.

    Recovery Tank Full Enable/Disable – It is possible to enable or disable the Recovery Tank Full automatic shutoff feature. Enable means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned on; disable means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned off.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and scrub switches backward and the solution switch forward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum down, scrub down, solution up
    Rocker switch positions

    The Heavy Scrub Pressure Indicator will remain on and the Fault Indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = Enabled
    • 2 blinks = Disabled
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 31, used with permission. SES ref PF-DFRG-VLTJ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​⁠‍‌‌‌⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‌​‌‍‌‍​‍‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 31 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Restore Factory Defaults – This function is used to reset all settings to factory default values. If this is done, the next time the key is turned on, it will act as though a new controller has been installed and “force” you to set the mandatory program options before the machine will operate normally.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌‍​⁠​‍​​⁠‍‌​​‌‍‌​​‌​​

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum switch forward and scrub and solution switches backward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum up, scrub down, solution down
    Rocker switch positions

    The Regular Scrub Pressure Indicator will remain on and the Fault Indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = No
    • 2 blinks = Yes

    Fault Recall – The fault indicator normally flashes out “current” codes only. This function is used by a technician to check for “historical codes” and clear them.

    To check or clear historical codes:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and solution switches backward and the scrub switch forward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum down, scrub up, solution down
    Rocker switch positions

    The High Solution Flow Indicator will remain on and the Fault Indicator will be flashing out all historical codes set since the last time they were cleared. To exit this function without clearing codes, press the scrub switch forward. To clear historical codes press the solution switch forward.

    Fault Detection - Normally, the Main Machine Controller will perform checks of the electrical system during operation. If a fault occurs in a particular system, that system (and possibly others) will be shut down. This can make troubleshooting the system difficult. This option will allow service personnel to disable some of the fault detection checks to facilitate troubleshooting. This will not disable the over-current protection on any of the systems.

    To check or change the setting:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and solution switches forward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum up, scrub no arrow, solution up
    Rocker switch positions

    The Medium Solution Flow Indicator will remain on and the Fault Indicator will be flashing a numeric value that represents the current setting. To change the setting, press the solution switch forward to increase the value or backwards to decrease the value. To save the setting, press the scrub switch forward (All LEDs will turn on) then turn off the key switch.

    • 1 blink = Fault Detection Enabled
    • 2 blinks = Fault Detection Disabled
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 32, used with permission. SES ref PF-K5SV-HKX6‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌‍​⁠​‍​​⁠‍‌​​‌‍‌​​‌​​
    Form Number 56043150Page 32 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Software Revision Code – This function is used to display the software revision. The Fault LED blinks a two-part code to indicate the revision of the software that is currently programmed into the microcontroller program memory. The first part of the code indicates the released revision letter: 1 blink = revision A, 2 blinks = revision B, etc.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌‍‌‌‍⁠‍‍‌​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌⁠‌‍​

    To check the revision:

    1. While pressing and holding the vacuum and scrub switches forward, turn the key switch on.
    2. Wait about 3 seconds until all of the LEDs light up and then go off. Release the switches.
    Three rocker switches (vacuum, scrub, solution) from left to right with yellow arrows: vacuum up, scrub up, solution no arrow
    Rocker switch positions

    The Low, Medium and High Solution Flow indicators will remain on and the fault indicator will flash out the revision code.

    Programming options – SC750 and SC800 models (control panel with membrane switches)

    In shortOn SC750 and SC800 models every program option is reached through a hidden menu on the LCD. Hold the scrub on/off and vacuum/wand switches while turning the key on, wait about 3 seconds for “Programming Options”, then scroll with the solution increase and decrease switches.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌‍‌‌‍⁠‍‍‌​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌⁠‌‍​

    Main Machine Controller special program options allow the service repairperson to match the control board to the specific model equipment and to user preferences. They also allow adjustments to some machine functions, and provide a way to see the controller’s revision level. On SC750 and SC800 models, all program option modes are entered through a “hidden menu” that is displayed on the LCD.

    To enter the Programming Options mode: (Start with the battery charger unplugged and the key off)

    1. Press and hold the scrub ON/OFF switch and Vacuum/Wand switch together.
    Hand on the membrane switch control panel with two fingers pressing the scrub on/off switch and the vacuum/wand switch, key switch at the lower right
    Hold the scrub on/off and vacuum/wand switches
    1. While holding both switches, turn the Key Switch to the ON position.
    2. Continue to hold both switches about 3 seconds until the display shows “Programming Options”, then release the switches.
    LCD display reading PROGRAM OPTIONS, 1. DECK TYPE
    Programming Options display
    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired programming option.
    2. Press the Solution On/Off switch to enter the mode.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 33, used with permission. SES ref PF-NEJQ-R6ES‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌‍‌‌‍⁠‍‍‌​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌⁠‌‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 33 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Mandatory program options

    These options must be set to correctly match the Main Machine Controller to the machine.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‌‌⁠‍⁠‌‌‍‍‍‌‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‍⁠

    DECK TYPE – There are 5 possible scrub deck options (Early model display names are different). This function configures the control unit current settings, flow rate settings, and scrub pressure settings for each of the scrub deck types.

    • REV 2 Deck
    • 28 INCH / 71 cm CYL or 28 INCH CYL / BA756C (Early models)
    • 32 INCH / 81 cm CYL or 32 INCH CYL (Early models)
    • 26 INCH / 66 cm DISC or 26 INCH DISC (Early models)
    • 28 INCH / 71 cm DISC or 28 INCH DISC / BA756 (Early models)
    • 34 INCH / 86 cm DISC or 34 INCH DISC / BA856 (Early models)

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    MACHINE PLATFORM – This function configures the control unit for the machine size (Early model display names are different). Select between 21-gallon (80 L) medium-platform machine (SC750, SC750 ST) or 25-gallon (95 L) large-platform machine (SC800, SC800 ST). This setting will affect the solution level, solution, and chemical flow rate calculations in the firmware.

    • SC750 (21 GAL / 80 LTR) or MX (21 GAL / 80 LITRE) (Early models)
    • SC800 (25 GAL / 95 LTR or LX (25 GAL / 95 LITRE) (Early models)

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    CHEMICAL SELECTION – This function is used to let the controller know whether or not the machine is equipped with the optional Detergent (Chemical) Mixing system and what brand to display upon power up. If it is equipped, it also needs to know what geographic location the machine is used in for displaying the detergent ratio as expected in that region. North America mode: Shows chemical ratio using X: XXX notation (example 1: 300) and the “Advance” brand upon power up for the “Americas market” (North, South and Central America). Global mode: (Outside of North, South and Central America) Shows chemical ratio using percentage notation (example 0.3%) and the “Nilfisk-Advance” brand upon power up. In off mode, the chemical icon and ratio are not displayed on the LCD.

    • NO ONBOARD CHEMICAL
    • N.AMERICA CHEM MODE
    • GLOBAL CHEM MODE

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 34, used with permission. SES ref PF-JW7U-UGMY‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌​‌‌⁠‍⁠‌‌‍‍‍‌‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 34 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    DETERGENT MODE – This function is used to configure the way the EcoFlex system behaves or to disable it. Different geographic locations desire different EcoFlex behavior. This mode provides the ability to match the behavior to market area desires.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍⁠‌‌​‍‍‌

    • OFF – Disables EcoFlex feature
    • MODE 1 – Expected to be used in combination with N.AMERICA CHEM MODE.
    • MODE 2 – Expected to be used alone or in combination with GLOBAL CHEM MODE.

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    BATTERY CHARGER SELECTION –This function is used to inform the Main Machine Controller whether or not the machine is equipped with the optional S.P.E. on-board battery charger (The S.P.E charger was used on early machines. Later machines use the Delta-Q IC650 battery charger). It is also used to inform the controller of what kind of batteries the machine is equipped with. The Main Machine Controller will request a specific charging profile from the S.P.E battery charger to match the batteries.

    • NONE (Use when not equipped with on-board battery charger)
    • WET 25A (Use with 242 AH WET Batteries 56206079 or 310 AH WET Batteries 56391391)
    • AGM DISCOVER 25A (Use with 312 AH AGM Batteries 56315959)
    • GEL EXIDE 25A
    • GEL-AGM 25A
    • WET 15A
    • GEL-AGM 15A

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    LOW VOLT CUTOUT - The purpose of the low battery voltage cutout function is to help prolong battery life. The scrub deck will be raised and the brush motors, vacuum motor, and solution solenoid valve will turn OFF automatically and cease to function when the batteries discharge to the selected cutout level. The cutout level is adjustable between two settings. The standard setting (wet cell/lead acid) is 20.55 volts and alternate setting (AGM) is 21.75 volts.

    • WET BATTERY 80%, LVC = 20.55V
    • MAIN FREE BATTERY 70%, LVC = 21.75V

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 35, used with permission. SES ref PF-C6Z3-BHXD‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍⁠‌‌​‍‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 35 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Additional program options

    The following options can be used to set user preferences.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍​​​​‍‌‍​‌‍‍‍​‌‌​⁠‍​‌‍

    LOCKOUT BRUSH PRE - For disc brush decks only, it is possible to lock out either the Low or High Brush Pressure setting. During normal operation the pressure setting(s) that are locked out will not be able to be selected.

    • NONE
    • LOW
    • HIGH

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    LOCKOUT SOL FLOWS - It is possible to lock out any one or more of the Solution Flow Rate settings. During normal operation, the flow rate(s) that are locked out will not be able to be selected.

    • NONE
    • LOW
    • MEDIUM
    • HIGH
    • LOW & MEDIUM
    • LOW & HIGH
    • MEDIUM & HIGH

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    RECOVER TANK FULL – It is possible to enable or disable the Recovery Tank Full automatic shutoff feature. Enable means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned on. The system will shut off the vacuum motor if it senses the tank is full. Disable means that the automatic shutoff feature is turned off. The system will not automatically shut off the vacuum motor if it senses the tank is full.

    • ENABLED
    • DISABLED

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 36, used with permission. SES ref PF-6YVB-VMKR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍​​​​‍‌‍​‌‍‍‍​‌‌​⁠‍​‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 36 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    CHEMICAL RATE BIAS – This function allows a fine tuning of the detergent ratio.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠​​‌‍‌‍‍‍‌​‌‍⁠⁠‍​‌‍⁠‍‌

    • NONE
    • +10% MORE CHEMICAL
    • -10% LESS CHEMICAL

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    RESTORE DEFAULTS - This function is used to reset all settings to factory default values. If this is done, the next time the key is turned on, it will act as though a new controller has been installed and “force” you to set the mandatory program options before the machine will operate normally.

    • NO
    • YES

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.

    DISPLAY REV LEVEL – Used to display the software revision.

    This is not a setting that can be changed. After viewing the revision value, press the scrub on/off switch to return to the main menu.

    FAULT RECALL - This function is used by a technician to check for “historical codes” and clear them. If no fault code is present, the display should show a dash symbol ( - ). If the solution on/off button is pressed in the Fault Recall submenu, the fault history shall be erased. Press the scrub on/off switch to return to the main menu.

    FAULT DETECTION - Normally, the Main Machine Controller will perform checks of the electrical system during operation. If a fault occurs in a particular system, that system (and possibly others) will be shut down. This can make troubleshooting the system difficult. This option will allow service personnel to disable some of the fault detection checks to facilitate troubleshooting. This will not disable the over-current protection on any of the systems.

    • ENABLED
    • DISABLED

    To change the setting:

    1. Scroll through the menu using the Solution Increase and Decrease switches until you get to the desired value.
    2. To save and go back to the main menu, press the scrub ON/OFF switch.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 37, used with permission. SES ref PF-PZR5-XPTC‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠​​‌‍‌‍‍‍‌​‌‍⁠⁠‍​‌‍⁠‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 37 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Main Machine Controller SC750 ST and SC800 ST models (early build)

    In shortTo get at the controller on an early-build ST machine you pivot the handle down, take out the circuit breaker plate and then the electrical panel cover. When a new controller goes in, the Scrub Deck Type and Battery Charger Selection must be set before the machine will run (page 40).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌​‌‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‌‌‌

    Note: Electronic devices like the Main Machine Controller are sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Before handling the controller, touch a metal bench or shelf to discharge any electrical charge that may have built up in your body. Do not walk around with a controller in your hands.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌​‌‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‌‌‌

    1. Empty recovery tank. Turn off key.
    2. Remove upper handle mounting bolts, loosen lower mounting bolts and pivot handle assembly downward.
    3. Remove circuit breaker mounting nuts.
    4. Remove circuit breaker mount plate screws. Partially remove plate. Remove breakers from plate, then turn plate and insert into cover opening.
    Back of the handle area with the circuit breaker mounting plate showing a 30A and a 10A breaker and a callout reading Remove Circuit Breaker Mounting Plate
    Circuit breaker mounting plate
    Hand pulling the circuit breaker mounting plate partway out of the cover opening
    Plate turned and inserted into the cover opening
    1. Remove electrical panel cover mounting screws.
    Two photos with red circles marking the electrical panel cover mounting screws: at the lower left and right of the breaker plate area, and on the top of the cover near the recovery tank
    Electrical panel cover mounting screw locations
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 38, used with permission. SES ref PF-DJIL-5W5H‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌​‌‍‍​‍⁠‍⁠​‌​‌‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 38 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Tip cover away from machine and disconnect electrical connectors from the Main Machine Controller and Key Switch. Remove the control switch interface panel ground screw.
    Electrical panel cover with the circuit board, ribbon cable, wiring harness, circuit breakers and key switch visible
    Electrical panel cover with controller
    1. Place electrical panel cover on work bench. Disconnect the “ribbon” connector to the control switches. (Note the orientation of the ribbon to the wiring connector. )
    Hand holding the ribbon connector for the control switches next to the circuit board
    Ribbon connector to the control switches
    1. Release the control panel ribbon connection and pull the ribbon free. Gently pull ribbon out of the ferrite bead.
    Circuit board close-up with callouts: Control Panel Ribbon, Ferrite Bead, and Gently push to release (the ribbon connector latch)
    Ribbon release and ferrite bead
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 39, used with permission. SES ref PF-W7JY-QBCF‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍​⁠​‌‍⁠‌⁠⁠​‍‌​‌‌⁠‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 39 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Remove 4 screws securing the Main Machine Controller and remove it from the cover.
    Main Machine Controller circuit board in the cover with its four mounting screws circled in red
    Controller mounting screws
    1. Reassemble in reverse order, taking care not to damage the printed circuit ribbons used to connect the circuit board to the control switch interface panel.
    2. Set Mandatory Program Options - IMPORTANT! When a new controller is installed, it must first be told how the machine is equipped before it will work. The first time the key is turned on, the controller wakes up in the programming option mode to “force” you to complete the settings. In this special case, you will be walked through setting the Scrub Deck Type and Battery Charger Selection before the machine will operate. See Programming Options – SC750 ST and SC800 ST Models (Control Panel with rocker switches) - Mandatory Program Options (page 29).
    Parts for this job

    Main Machine Controller SC750 ST and SC800 ST models (later build)

    Minor changes were made to the electrical panel cover and circuit breaker panel to make the machine easier to service. Follow the instructions for “Main Machine Controller SC750 and SC800 Models (control Panel with membrane switches) Later build “ with the realization that some of the photos will not exactly match the machine you are working on.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​​⁠‌⁠‍‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‍‍​‍​​‍⁠‍

    Main Machine Controller SC750 and SC800 models (early build)

    Note: Electronic devices like the Main Machine Controller are sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Before handling the controller, touch a metal bench or shelf to discharge any electrical charge that may have built up in your body. Do not walk around with a controller in your hands.

    1. Completely drain solution tank. This is important for the solution level sensor to work properly upon reassembly.
    2. Turn off and remove key.
    3. Disconnect Handle electrical connector. Remove top two handle bolts and loosen the lower two. Rotate Handle Assembly down.
    Back of the handle with callouts: Remove (the two upper handle bolts), Loosen (the two lower handle bolts) and Disconnect (the handle electrical connector), above the 30A and 10A breakers
    Handle bolts and electrical connector
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 40, used with permission. SES ref PF-XLL2-BMYQ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌​​⁠‌⁠‍‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‍‍​‍​​‍⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 40 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Remove circuit breaker mounting plate screws. Partially remove plate. Remove breakers from plate, then turn plate and insert into cover opening.
    Back of the handle area with the circuit breaker mounting plate showing a 30A and a 10A breaker and a callout reading Remove Circuit Breaker Mounting Plate
    Circuit breaker mounting plate
    Hand pulling the circuit breaker mounting plate partway out of the cover opening
    Plate turned and inserted into the cover opening
    1. Remove electrical panel cover mounting screws.
    Two photos with red circles marking the electrical panel cover mounting screws: at the lower left and right of the breaker plate area, and on the top of the cover beside the recovery tank
    Electrical panel cover mounting screw locations
    1. Tip cover away from machine and disconnect the clear pressure sensor hose from the fitting at the solution tank. DO NOT TRY TO DISCONNECT THE HOSE FROM THE CIRCUIT BOARD.
    Wiring bundle with a callout reading Disconnect Hose, pointing to the white pressure sensor hose fitting at the solution tank circled in red
    Pressure sensor hose fitting
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 41, used with permission. SES ref PF-GBQ4-WH4I‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍⁠​‌⁠​⁠‌‍⁠⁠​‍‍⁠⁠‌‍​‌⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 41 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Disconnect electrical connectors from the Main Machine Controller and Key Switch. Remove screw securing ground wire to control switch interface panel.
    Electrical panel cover tipped away from the machine with callouts: Key Switch Connectors, Ground Screw Location and Controller Connectors
    Connectors and ground screw
    1. Remove the electrical panel cover and place on a work bench.
    2. Remove the 5 screws securing the switch panel interface and carefully turn the cover over. Remove 4 screws securing circuit board (Main Machine Controller) to cover. Remove the control switch interface panel and circuit board together through the cover opening.
    Circuit board in the inside of the cover with the clear pressure sensor tube attached and the four board mounting screws circled in red
    Controller board mounting screws
    1. If the board is being replaced you will need to use a new pressure sensor tube or transfer the existing tube from the old board. Follow the steps below to transfer the tube.
    Circuit board held over the cover with a large red arrow pointing to the fitting where the clear pressure sensor tube attaches
    Transferring the pressure sensor tube
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 42, used with permission. SES ref PF-OSA3-L47E‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‍‌⁠⁠‍‌​​​‍⁠‍‌‍‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 42 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. a. Use a small sharp knife to cut the tube off, near the sensor on the board (0.04 in (1 mm) from sensor).
      Hand using a small knife to cut the clear pressure tube off next to the sensor on the circuit board
      Cutting the tube off near the sensor
    2. b. Make a shallow slit with the knife along the length of the clear tube that is still attached to the sensor port. Do not press too hard, and avoid cutting into the sensor port. Make 3 or 4 passes with the knife, pressing softly, rather than one hard cut. See the photos below.
      Two photos: the knife slitting along the clear tube on the sensor port, and the slit tube removed from the sensor port
      Slitting the tube
    3. c. To install the sensor onto a new PCB assembly, grasp the tube near the end with your fingers, and slowly push the tube onto the sensor port. Do not push too hard or the sensor may break.
      Fingers pushing the clear tube onto the sensor port of a new circuit board
      Installing the tube on the new board
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 43, used with permission. SES ref PF-7TRL-IHB4‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‍‌⁠​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍​‌‍⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 43 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Reassemble in reverse order, taking care not to damage the printed circuit ribbons used to connect the circuit board to the control switch interface panel. If you did not drain the solution tank earlier, you must do so before connecting the pressure sensor hose in order for the solution level “gauge” to work properly.

    Main machine controller SC750 and SC800 models (later build)

    In shortOn later-build SC750 and SC800 machines you take the whole electrical panel cover off the machine first and put it on a bench, then remove the controller from the cover. Drain the solution tank first, and do not remove the control switch interface panel until the cover is off the machine (steps 1 to 12 on pages 44 to 49).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‌‍​​​‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠

    Note: Electronic devices like the Main Machine Controller are sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Before handling the controller, touch a metal bench or shelf to discharge any electrical charge that may have built up in your body. Do not walk around with a controller in your hands.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‌‍​​​‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠

    Summary: Remove the electrical panel cover as an assembly and place on a bench. Then remove the main machine controller from the cover. Do not remove the control switch interface panel before the cover is removed from the machine.

    1. Completely drain solution tank. This is important for the solution level sensor to work properly upon reassembly.
    2. Turn off and remove key.
    3. Remove top two handle bolts and loosen the lower two. Rotate Handle Assembly down.
      Rear of the machine handle with the two top handle bolts marked Remove and the two lower handle bolts marked Loosen
      Handle bolts: remove the top two, loosen the lower two
    4. Disconnect handle wiring lead (Note photo is of early build).
      Hand unplugging the handle wiring lead next to the 30A and 10A circuit breakers
      Disconnecting the handle wiring lead
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 44, used with permission. SES ref PF-AISB-A7JE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‌‍​​​‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 44 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Remove circuit breaker plate attaching screws.
      Circuit breaker plate with the two attaching screws circled and marked Remove
      Circuit breaker plate screws
    2. Remove nut securing key switch.
      Adjustable wrench on the nut of the key switch on the blue control panel
      Key switch nut
    3. Remove electrical panel cover upper mounting screws.
      Rear of the machine with the two upper cover mounting screws circled and marked Remove
      Upper cover mounting screws
    4. Loosen electrical panel cover lower mounting screws.
      Rear of the machine with the two lower cover mounting screws circled and marked Loosen
      Lower cover mounting screws
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 45, used with permission. SES ref PF-RLAP-DJG3‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠‍‌​‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‌‌‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 45 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Tip cover away from machine
      1. a. Remove the screw securing the ground wire to the back of the control switch interface panel.
        Ground wire ring terminal held by a screw behind the control switch interface panel
        Ground wire screw
      2. b. Disconnect the clear pressure sensor hose from the fitting at the solution tank. DO NOT TRY TO DISCONNECT THE HOSE FROM THE CIRCUIT BOARD.
        CAUTION! Do not remove hose from control board. Only disconnect hose at solution tank fitting.
        Caution label: do not remove hose from control board (crossed-out circle); only disconnect hose at solution tank fitting (green circle)
        Caution label
        Wiring bundle with the pressure hose fitting at the solution tank circled and labeled Disconnect Hose
        Hose fitting at the solution tank
      3. c. Unplug main machine controller electrical connectors.
        Hand unplugging a connector from the main machine controller circuit board
        Unplugging the controller connectors
      4. d. Free circuit breakers, handle switch connector and key switch from cover assembly.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 46, used with permission. SES ref PF-NXNB-SZFI‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠‌​​‍⁠‌⁠​​​​‍‌⁠​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 46 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Remove the electrical panel cover assembly and place on a work bench.
      1. a. Remove the 5 screws securing the switch panel interface and carefully turn the cover over.
      2. b. Remove 4 screws securing circuit board (Main Machine Controller) to cover.
        Cover turned over on a bench with the four circuit board screws circled and a screwdriver on one
        Four circuit board screws
      3. c. Remove the control switch interface panel and main machine controller circuit board together through the cover opening.
        Interface panel and controller circuit board lifted together out of the cover opening
        Removing the interface panel and board together
    2. If the board is being replaced you will need to use a new pressure sensor tube or transfer the existing tube from the old board. Follow the steps below to transfer the tube.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 47, used with permission. SES ref PF-EHSY-JG5V‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍⁠‍‌‍‍‌‌​‌‌‍‍‍⁠‍‌⁠‌⁠‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 47 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. a. Use a small sharp knife to cut the tube off, near the sensor on the board (0.04 in (1 mm) from sensor).
      Hand using a small knife to cut the clear pressure tube off next to the sensor on the circuit board
      Cutting the tube off near the sensor
    2. b. Make a shallow slit with the knife along the length of the clear tube that is still attached to the sensor port. Do not press too hard, and avoid cutting into the sensor port. Make 3 or 4 passes with the knife, pressing softly, rather than one hard cut. See the photos below.
      Two photos: the knife slitting along the clear tube on the sensor port, and the slit tube removed from the sensor port
      Slitting the tube
    3. c. To install the sensor onto a new PCB assembly, grasp the tube near the end with your fingers, and slowly (continues on page 49)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 48, used with permission. SES ref PF-DP6C-WF6B‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‌‌⁠‍⁠​‍‌⁠​‌​​​‍‍⁠‌‍​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 48 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    push the tube onto the sensor port. Do not push too hard or the sensor may break.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌​⁠⁠​‌

    Fingers pushing the clear tube onto the sensor port of a new circuit board
    Installing the tube on the new board
    1. Reassemble in reverse order noting the following:
      1. a. Take care not to damage the printed circuit ribbons used to connect the circuit board to the control switch interface panel.
      2. b. Reinstall and secure the key switch, circuit breakers and handle wiring connector before fastening the cover down.
      3. c. If you did not drain the solution tank earlier, you must do so before connecting the pressure sensor hose in order for the solution level “gauge” to work properly.
      4. d. Refer to the wiring connection decal on the back of the cover to reconnect any wires that may have come loose. Double check all electrical connections.
    Wiring connection decal: circuit breaker wiring as viewed from back of panel, and key switch wiring as viewed from back of switch
    Wiring connection decal
    Part (as viewed from back)PositionWire as printed
    10A circuit breakerUpper terminalYEL, YEL X18-1, YEL
    Lower terminalRED X17-1
    30A circuit breakerUpper terminalORN X20-1
    Lower terminalRED X19-1
    Key switchTerminal 3YEL X51-1
    Terminal B1WHT/BRN X72-1, BRN X52-1
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 49, used with permission. SES ref PF-MY3A-25N3‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​​​⁠‌‍⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌​⁠⁠​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 49 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Rocker switches – ST models

    1. Remove the electrical panel cover to access the back side of the rocker switches. DO NOT try to access the switches by removing the switch plate as you may damage a “ribbon” wiring strip.
    2. Disconnect the ribbon strip connector to the switches. (Note the orientation of the ribbon and connector for reassembly).
      Hand holding the ribbon strip connector unplugged from the back of the rocker switches
      Disconnecting the ribbon strip connector
    3. Disconnect the wiring from the switch you are removing.
      Back of the three rocker switches with wire labels: Solution switch 3. ORG/GRY, 2. ORG/BLK, 1. ORG/BLU; Scrub switch 3. ORG/GRN, 2. ORG/BLK, 1. ORG/YEL; Vacuum/Wand switch 3. ORG/RED, 2. ORG/BLK, 1. ORG/BRN; retaining lock tab marked
      Rocker switch wiring
      SwitchTerminalWire
      Solution switch3ORG/GRY
      2ORG/BLK
      1ORG/BLU
      Scrub switch3ORG/GRN
      2ORG/BLK
      1ORG/YEL
      Vacuum/Wand switch3ORG/RED
      2ORG/BLK
      1ORG/BRN
    4. Push on the switch retaining lock tabs located at each corner and push the switch back through the cover.
    5. Install the switch by pressing it into place.
    6. Reinstall the wiring and finish reassembling in the reverse order of disassembly.
    Parts for this job
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 50, used with permission. SES ref PF-SAQN-D4OX‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌​‍‌⁠​‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‍‌​‍‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 50 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Specifications

    Shop measurements – main machine controller

    In shortThese tables list typical shop voltages at the main machine controller connectors (J1, J2 and J3, pages 51 to 53) so you can tell what normal looks like. Values were measured with the black meter lead on the main battery negative terminal unless a comment says otherwise.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠‌‍​‍⁠‍​‌​‍​⁠‌‍‌​‍​‌‌

    The following tables contain some “real world” shop voltage measurements to help you recognize what “normal” looks like. All voltage values were measured with the black (Negative) voltmeter lead connected to the main battery negative terminal unless otherwise specified. (Non ST = SC750 and SC800 models. ST = SC750 ST and SC800 ST models)‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠‌‍​‍⁠‍​‌​‍​⁠‌‍‌​‍​‌‌

    J1 connector

    Pin #Circuit descriptionValueCommentsUsed on Non ST or ST
    1Chemical Pump “+” outputNon ST
    2Not usedBoth
    3Chemical Pump “-“ outputNon ST
    4Brush Head Actuator motor “+” output

    24v down

    -24v up

    With red lead at pin #4 and black lead at pin #5Both
    5Brush Head Actuator motor “-“ outputBoth
    6Not usedBoth
    7Not usedBoth
    8Battery Negative (Ground)0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    9Not usedBoth
    10Not usedBoth

    J2 connector

    Pin #Circuit descriptionValueCommentsUsed on Non ST or ST
    1Battery Negative (Ground)0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    2Battery Negative (Ground)0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    3Input from Brush Deck actuator position switch #0. Switch floats open when actuator is fully retracted (corresponding to a raised deck), and is closed to GND otherwise.4.95VUp Position. Other positions 0.5mVBoth
    4Not usedBoth
    5Not usedBoth
    6Not usedBoth
    7Battery Negative (Ground)0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 51, used with permission. SES ref PF-KRWM-WXER‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠‌‍​‍⁠‍​‌​‍​⁠‌‍‌​‍​‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 51 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    J2 connector (continued)

    Pin #Circuit descriptionValueCommentsUsed on Non ST or ST
    8Battery Negative (Ground)0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    9Vacuum Motor Current Sense input (voltage on this wire represents the motor current)181 mVVacuum motor running with solution cover open. Dropped to 157 mV when ball float was seated.Both
    10Brush Motor Current Sense input (voltage on this wire represents the motor current)30mVBrushes free running – not contacting floorBoth
    11Input from Brush Deck actuator position switch #1. Switch floats open when actuator is partially extended (corresponding to normal scrub pressure), and is closed to GND otherwise.4.96VNormal scrub position. Other positions 0.5mVBoth
    12

    Pin has 2 functions:‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠​​⁠‍‌​‌⁠‍‍‌​‍‌‍‌​⁠​‌‌

    1) Input from Brush Deck actuator position switch #2. Switch floats open when actuator is fully extended (corresponding to maximum scrub pressure), and is closed to GND otherwise.

    2) When an S.P.E. on-board battery charger is installed and plugged into an AC outlet, the input function of this signal is overridden and instead becomes a 1-wire, bidirectional serial communication line between the PC board and the on-board charger.

    2.91V

    Extra scrub pressure position. Other positions 795mV.

    If the S.P.E. Battery Charger is plugged in, voltage pulses then settles in around 12V

    Both

    J3 connector

    Pin #Circuit descriptionValueCommentsUsed on Non ST or ST
    1Battery “+“ lead24.0vWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    2Battery “-“ lead0.5mVWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    3Brush Remove contactor output28mVWhen energized. Otherwise 24VNon ST
    4On-Board Charger Interlock input (input = key switch voltage when on-board battery charger is not plugged into AC outlet, floats open when on-board charger is plugged in.)25VKey on and Charger NOT plugged in. When Charger is plugged in, drops to 116mVBoth
    5Reverse Direction input from Speed Controller (input = GND when moving in reverse)

    2mV

    23V

    In Reverse.

    In Neutral or Forward

    Both
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 52, used with permission. SES ref PF-KOYJ-3LZX‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠​​⁠‍‌​‌⁠‍‍‌​‍‌‍‌​⁠​‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 52 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    J3 connector (continued)

    Pin #Circuit descriptionValueCommentsUsed on Non ST or ST
    6Fwd/Reverse input from Speed Controller (input = GND when moving in forward or reverse)

    4mV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠⁠‌​‌​​‌⁠‍​​‌‌⁠‌⁠​⁠​​⁠

    24.1V

    In Forward or Reverse

    In Neutral

    Both
    7Speed Controller Status input (input pulses between B+ and GND to indicate error status from Speed Controller)121mVNormal (No faults). Voltage pulses when fault is present.Both
    8Battery “+“ lead24.0vWith vacuum motor runningBoth
    9Not usedBoth
    10Not usedBoth
    11Solution Solenoid Valve winding116mVWhen energized (Hold solution button down)Both
    12Vacuum Contactor winding4.9VWhen energized, voltage initially drops to 90mV then settles at 4.9v. This is due to 100% “on” time at first to pull in the contactor, which is then reduced to 80% to hold it in.Both
    13Brush Motor Contactor winding4.9VWhen energized, voltage initially drops to 90mV then settles at 4.9v. This is due to 100% “on” time at first to pull in the contactor, which is then reduced to 80% to hold it in.Both
    14Key Switch input (input = B+ voltage when key is turned on)24.9VKey On or Off with on-board battery chargerBoth
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 53, used with permission. SES ref PF-HT7S-EEW4‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠⁠‌​‌​​‌⁠‍​​‌‌⁠‌⁠​⁠​​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 53 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Electrical system

    Functional description

    General

    In shortThe machine runs on four 6 volt batteries wired in series for 24 volts. A steel plate at the back of the solution tank is the electrical panel, and the wire ends are marked with identification that matches the wiring harness configuration diagram.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‍‍‍​

    The electrical system is powered by four 6 volt batteries for a total of 24 volts. Heavy cables connect the batteries in series. A large red Main Battery Pack Connector provides battery power to the machine wiring. On machines without an on-board battery charger, the Main Battery Pack Connector is used for hooking up the batteries to a “shelf” battery charger unit. To prevent damage to the batteries due to excessive discharging, the control system will turn off the scrub system and the recovery system as the battery voltage drops too low.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‍‍‍​

    A steel plate at the back of the solution tank serves as an “electrical panel” and provides a mounting surface for the various relays, fuses and the Drive Motor Controller. Circuit breakers and a main fuse protect various circuits from excessive current. The machine wiring is color coded and the ends of each wire have the wire identification printed on them (such as “J1-4 X1-1”). The wiring identification information can be used to more easily trace wiring in the machine because it is also shown on the wiring harness configuration diagram.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 54, used with permission. SES ref PF-F326-GLQV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠​​‌‍⁠⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‍‍‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 54 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    On-board battery charger

    In shortEarly machines used an S.P.E. on-board charger and later machines use a Delta-Q IC650. Either charger opens an interlock circuit when it is plugged into AC power, which stops the machine from being operated while the batteries charge.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‍‌​‍​⁠⁠​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‍‌‍​‌​

    An optional on-board battery charger is available. Early machines used an S.P.E. charger and later machines use a Delta-Q IC650 battery charger. Some early machines may have been updated to replace the S.P.E. charger with the Delta-Q charger.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‍‌​‍​⁠⁠​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‍‌‍​‌​

    Two photos side by side: the Delta-Q charger (silver finned case with LED indicator) and the S.P.E. charger (black finned case)
    Delta-Q charger and S.P.E. charger

    When equipped, the charger is mounted on the bottom of the machine. Both chargers have an internal relay that interrupts a power supply when the charger is plugged into an AC power outlet. This is called the “Interlock” circuit on the wiring diagram. It prevents the machine from being operated while the batteries are charging. The interlock circuit for the S.P.E. charger is illustrated below. The Delta-Q interlock circuit is similar but it relies on the main battery positive connection for the power source rather than a separate wire.

    Here is how the battery charger interlock circuit works. The interlock relay contacts inside the charger are normally closed, allowing the current to pass in and out of the charger to the Main Machine Controller and the Drive Motor Controller. When the AC power cord is plugged in, the relay is energized and opens the relay contacts opening the circuit.

    Battery Charger Interlock Circuit, not plugged into power: B+ through CB 2 and the key switch to the interlock relay closed contacts inside the battery charger, then on to the Drive Motor Controller and the Main Machine Controller
    Battery charger interlock circuit – not plugged into power
    Label printed on drawing
    Battery Charger Interlock Circuit - Not Plugged Into Power
    B+
    CB 2
    Key Switch
    Closed Contacts
    Interlock Relay
    Battery Charger
    Drive Motor Controller
    Main Machine Controller
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 55, used with permission. SES ref PF-LPZX-F36F‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠‍‌​‍​⁠⁠​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‍‌‍​‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 55 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    S.P.E battery charger details

    When the S.P.E battery charger is plugged in, “Non-ST” models will display text on the LCD screen describing the type of battery charging profile in use. They will also communicate charging progress with an ICON on the LCD display. When the S.P.E. battery charger is plugged in on ST models, charging progress is communicated using the Battery Indicator LEDs. The charging profile in use is communicated using one of the other control panel LEDs.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‍‍‍⁠​‍⁠‌‌⁠‌​​‍⁠​‌⁠‌​⁠

    ST charging profile in use:

    Charging profileLED
    Wet 25AVacuum LED
    AGM Discover 25AScrub High LED
    Gel Excide 25AScrub Low LED
    Gel-AGM 25ASolution High LED
    Wet 15ASolution Medium LED
    Gel-AGM 15ASolution Low LED

    The S.P.E. battery charger and Main Machine Controller communicate with one another on the WHT/BLU wire that runs between them. (This same circuit is also used for the brush head actuator position 2 switch input) Each time the battery charger is plugged in, the charger contacts the controller by sending out a positive voltage on the communication wire to find out what kind of batteries are on the machine. It needs to know this in order to use the correct charging profile. The controller responds and provides the battery type information it has stored in memory. The charger then tells the controller which charging profile it will use and begins charging the batteries. See the Control System, Program Options section for information on how to tell the controller what kind of batteries are used in the machine. If the charger is unable to communicate with the controller it will use the profile for a wet battery at a 25 Amp rate as a default.

    Delta-Q IC650 battery charger details

    The Delta-Q battery charger does not communicate with the main machine controller. It is a “stand-alone” unit. Models that have the Delta-Q charger have a separate LED on a bracket to communicate charging progress. By pressing a button on the charger you can see what charging profile is in use. If you replace the batteries with a different type of battery or replace the battery charger, you must select the correct charging profile to be compatible with the batteries. There are a set of profiles stored inside the charger. You can interface directly with the charger to select the profile to be used from that set. See the Delta-Q Product Manual (710-0138-Delta-Q.pdf) for complete instructions on selecting the profile. Use the Battery Charging Profile Table below (page 57) to choose the profile to match the batteries that are in the machine.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 56, used with permission. SES ref PF-6SH3-2HKA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌‍‍‍⁠​‍⁠‌‌⁠‌​​‍⁠​‌⁠‌​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 56 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Delta-Q IC650 battery charging profile table

    Battery manufacturerVoltageBattery model #20 hour ratingN-A P/NProfile to use
    DISCOVER6EV250A-AGM26040953AP-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EV305A-A31256112546P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EV305A-A31256315959P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EV305A-AGM31240964AP-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EVGT6A25556112545P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EVGT6A25556315772P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER6EVL 16A-A39056388582P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER12EV12A-A14056380239P-0-4-2
    DISCOVER12EV185A- A23456393912P-0-4-3
    DISCOVER12EV185A-A23441023AP-0-4-3
    EAST PENN MFG. CO.68GGC 2/T881 (GEL CELL)18056206987P-0-2-6
    EAST PENN MFG. CO.128G27MM/T87686.456206988P-0-2-6
    FULL RIVER6DC 250-625056112545P-1-5-1
    FULL RIVER6DC 335-633556112546P-1-4-1
    TROJAN6J -305G28556391391P-0-0-7
    TROJAN6J-250-2992-4125056026200P-0-0-3
    TROJAN6L16-5592-4139556388582NOT RECOMMENDED
    TROJAN6T-125LPT23556206079P-0-0-3
    TROJAN6T-605LPT19556206117P-0-0-3
    TROJAN12J185-2292-4219556206078P-0-0-3
    US BATTERY6L1637540602AP-0-7-3
    US BATTERY6L1637540704AP-0-7-3
    US BATTERY6L16HC41556388582P-0-7-3
    US BATTERY6US-125235331318P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-125235881317P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-12523556206079P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-12523540136AP-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-12523540136BP-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-14 5XC25156317154P-0-7-2
    US BATTERY6US180020156206117P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US250HC27556026200P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY6US-305305891384P-0-7-2
    US BATTERY6US-305305891385P-0-7-2
    US BATTERY6US-30530556391391P-0-7-2
    US BATTERY12UB278640070AP-0-0-6
    US BATTERY12US-185195871334P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY12US-185195871335P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY12US-18519556206078P-0-1-1
    US BATTERY12US-31TMX13040605AP-0-7-1
    US BATTERY12US-31TMX13040606AP-0-7-1
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 57, used with permission. SES ref PF-X3GO-36P7‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌‌⁠‍​‌‍‌‌​‍​‍‌‌​⁠​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 57 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Component locations

    • Batteries
    • Main Battery Pack Connector
    • Battery Charger (Optional)
    • Electrical Panel
    • Main Fuse
    • Battery Negative Stand Off
    • Circuit Breakers
    Rear of the machine with the circuit breakers on the handle panel circled and labeled Circuit Breakers
    Circuit breakers
    Battery compartment with the batteries labeled Batteries and the connection diagram on the tank labeled Connection Diagram
    Batteries and connection diagram
    Red connector at the rear of the machine labeled Main Battery Pack Connector
    Main battery pack connector
    Battery charger mounted under the frame, labeled Battery Charger
    Battery charger
    Electrical panel opened at the back of the machine with the Main Fuse, Electrical Panel and Battery Negative Stand Off labeled
    Main fuse, electrical panel and battery negative stand off
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 58, used with permission. SES ref PF-OSAR-GZET‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠‍‍⁠​⁠‍⁠‍​‍‍‍​‌‍‌‍⁠‌‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 58 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Electrical panel components

    Electrical panel with labels: 150 Amp Fuse F1, Brush Remove Relay K3, Vacuum Relay K1, Brush Contactor K2, Drive Motor Controller A2
    Electrical panel components
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 59, used with permission. SES ref PF-JM7T-ZB5C‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‌​⁠⁠​‌⁠​​‍​​​​‍‍​‍​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 59 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Maintenance and adjustments

    Battery maintenance and recharging

    See Instructions for Use Manual‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌​​​‌⁠⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌‌​‍

    Troubleshooting

    Insufficient machine operation time

    Possible causes:

    • Incorrect low-voltage cutout setting
    • Batteries not fully charged.
      • If there is any question whether the batteries are fully charged, they should be charged for at least 16 hours.
    • One or more weak batteries
      • To determine if one of the batteries is weak, measure the voltage across each individual battery while operating the machine. Write down the values and compare them. A battery that has a dead cell will typically be 1 – 2 volts lower than the others.
      • Use a battery load tester to test each battery.
      • For wet batteries, a hydrometer can be used to check the specific gravity of the electrolyte in each cell. A dead cell is one that reads 50 points or more lower than the other cells.
    • Battery cable connections

    The battery charger does not charge

    Possible causes:

    • Battery Charger
    • Wiring/Connections
    • Batteries

    Note: The optional S.P.E. on-board battery charger will charge, even if it cannot communicate with the Main Machine Controller.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 60, used with permission. SES ref PF-54OF-TZU5‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌​​​‌⁠⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌‌​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 60 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Removal and installation

    Batteries

    In shortIf the battery set has 50 or more cycles on it, replace all the batteries or add only a good used one, never a single new battery. Always disconnect the negative cable first and connect it last, and follow the warning below.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​⁠‍​‍⁠⁠‌

    If the set of batteries has 50 or more cycles on them, do not put a new battery into the set. Either replace with all new batteries or use a good used battery. Battery maintenance requirements change as they age. As they age they usually require longer charging time and a higher finish rate. The newer battery mixed in with old batteries will end up being overcharged, which will cause it to fail prematurely.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​⁠‍​‍⁠⁠‌

    WARNING! Use extreme caution when working with batteries. Sulfuric acid in batteries can cause severe injury if allowed to contact the skin or eyes. Explosive hydrogen gas is vented from the batteries through openings in the battery caps. This gas can be ignited by any electrical arc, spark or flame. Do not install any lead-acid battery in a sealed container or enclosure. Hydrogen gas from overcharging must be allowed to escape.

    When servicing batteries

    • Remove all jewelry
    • Do not smoke
    • Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves and a rubber apron
    • Work in a well-ventilated area
    • Do not allow tools to touch more than one battery terminal at a time
    • ALWAYS disconnect the negative (ground) cable first when replacing batteries to prevent sparks.
    • ALWAYS connect the negative cable last when installing batteries.
    CAUTION! Electrical components in this machine can be severely damaged if the batteries are not installed and connected properly. Only Nilfisk-Advance, a qualified electrician, or the battery manufacturer should install batteries.
    1. Empty the recovery tank and tip it up.
    2. Turn the key switch off and disconnect the main battery pack connector.
    3. Remove the battery cables.
      1. a. Do not allow metal tools to connect between battery cables or posts.
      2. b. Prevent cable ends from touching other cable ends or posts.
    4. Remove battery.
    5. Install battery.
    6. Reconnect battery cables making sure that they are connected properly. Refer to the diagram molded into the lower side of the recovery tank.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 61, used with permission. SES ref PF-BKJ7-XFOR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍​​⁠‍​‍⁠​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​⁠‍​‍⁠⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 61 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Battery charger - S.P.E.

    The battery charger is mounted to the bottom of the frame with 4 bolts that are screwed into threaded holes.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍​‍‌‌‍⁠​‌⁠‌​‍‌⁠‍‌‍⁠‍⁠

    Underside of the machine on its side showing the S.P.E. charger with the callout: Remove 4 mounting bolts (two on each end of charger)
    S.P.E. charger mounting bolts
    1. Drain the solution tank and recovery tank.
    2. Disconnect and remove the batteries, then lay the machine on its side using a soft surface to prevent scratching the machine.
    3. Cut tie straps securing AC power cable.
    4. Cut tie straps securing electrical connectors.
    5. Disconnect electrical connectors.
    6. Remove 4 battery charger mounting bolts (two on each end of the charger).
    7. Remove charger, thread AC power cable through opening.
    8. Reassemble in the reverse order. Tie wiring in same locations using new tie straps.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 62, used with permission. SES ref PF-X7XH-PN7S‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍​‍‌‌‍⁠​‌⁠‌​‍‌⁠‍‌‍⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 62 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Battery charger - Delta-Q

    1. Drain the solution tank and recovery tank.
    2. Disconnect and remove the batteries, then lay the machine on its side using a soft surface to prevent scratching the machine.
    3. Cut tie straps securing AC power cable.
    4. Cut tie straps securing electrical connectors.
    5. Remove the DC connector cover (B).
    Delta-Q charger with a wrench on the black DC connector cover, arrow labeled B
    DC connector cover (B)
    Hand lifting the black DC connector cover off the Delta-Q charger
    Removing the DC connector cover
    1. Remove the clamp (C). Disconnect the battery positive and negative wires (6) and the interlock wire (7)
    2. Disconnect the AC power cable (E) and the battery temperature sensor connector (D). Remove 4 battery charger mounting bolts.
    3. Remove charger
    4. Reassemble in the reverse order. Tie wiring in same locations using new tie straps.
    Delta-Q charger with callouts: C clamp, 6 battery positive and negative wires, 7 interlock wire, E AC power cable, D battery temperature sensor connector
    Clamp, wires, AC cable and sensor connector
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 63, used with permission. SES ref PF-GUJX-ZBDU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠​​‍‍⁠⁠⁠​‌‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 63 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Specifications

    Low voltage cut out threshold voltages

    In shortThe controller shuts the machine down in two stages as the battery voltage falls. At stage 1 the brushes, solution and detergent stop and the brush deck raises, and at stage 2 the vacuum stops. Wet and gel batteries use different thresholds, listed in the table below.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌​‍​‍​‍‌⁠​⁠‌​⁠‌

    The Main Machine Controller intentionally shuts down machine functions in two stages if the battery voltage drops too low. This is called “Low Voltage Cut Out”. It is done to preserve the life of the batteries. The first stage of low voltage cut out shuts off the scrub function by turning off the scrub brush motors and raising the brush deck. It also shuts off the solution and detergent. The vacuum is still allowed to run in order to recover solution that is on the floor. The second stage of low voltage cut out turns off the vacuum. Wet batteries and Gel batteries use different voltage thresholds.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌​‍​‍​‍‌⁠​⁠‌​⁠‌

    StageThreshold (volts)Shuts down
    1Wet Batteries – 20.55 VBrushes, solution, detergent and raises brush deck
    Gel Batteries – 21.75 V
    2Wet Batteries – 20.40 VVacuum
    Gel Batteries – 21.60 V

    Battery run time

    Typical battery run times may be around 2-4 hours.

    Battery compartment dimensions

    Length = 24.5 in (62.23 cm), Width = 14.25 in (36.2 cm), Height = 14.25 in (36.2 cm)

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 64, used with permission. SES ref PF-JJP7-R7RA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​⁠‌​‍​‍​‍‌⁠​⁠‌​⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 64 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring diagram - Non-ST, 56112170 Rev D, Early (before SN 4000077687)

    In shortPages 65 to 68 are the wiring diagrams, pages 69 to 72 the harness layouts and pages 73 and 74 the TrackClean option schematics. For the first two sets, pick the drawing for your machine: non-ST or ST, and built before or since serial number 4000077687. If you are not sure which one applies, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​​‌​​​‍
    Ladder-style wiring diagram, drawing 56112170 Rev D, for early non-ST machines, showing the battery, fuse F1, circuit breakers, optional S.P.E. on-board battery charger, control board A1, PG Drives speed controller A2, contactors, motors, optional hour meter and optional laser module
    Wiring diagram, non-ST, 56112170 Rev D (early)

    Printed ratings and model

    Fuse F1, 150 A. Battery, 24 VDC. Circuit breaker CB1, 30 A. Circuit breaker CB2, 10 A. Optional on-board battery charger S.P.E. model HF2-UI24V25A. A2 is the PG Drives speed controller, model i24-70. R2 is the 100K speed limit pot, R1 the 5K throttle pot, R3 is 3.9K. Contactor, vacuum (K1), 21.2 A.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​​‌​​​‍

    Drawing note

    When on board charger is used, remove BRN wire from key SW. Connect to BRN wire from battery charger & replace with WHT/ BRN from charger. Also move YEL/BRN wire at key switch from BRN to YEL

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 65, used with permission. SES ref PF-JTN5-7FXN‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‍‍​​‍‌‌‍‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​​‌​​​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 65 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring diagram - Non-ST, 56383889 Rev E, Late (Since SN 4000077687)

    Ladder-style wiring diagram, drawing 56383889 Rev E, for late non-ST machines, with TrackClean connections, key switch details A and B, and charger options 1, 2 and 3
    Wiring diagram, non-ST, 56383889 Rev E (late)

    Printed ratings and model

    Fuse F1, 150 A. Battery, 24 Vdc. Circuit breaker CB1, 30 A. Circuit breaker CB2, 10 A. Inline fuse F2, 3A. A2 is the PG Drives speed controller, model i24-70. R3 is 3.9k.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​​‌‌‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠​‌‍⁠​‌‍⁠

    Control board A1 connections as drawn

    PinLabel on drawingWire color printed
    J3-14KEY SWITCHBRN
    J3-4CHARGER INTERLOCKBRN
    J3-6FOR/REVWHT/RED
    J3-7STATUSWHT/ORG
    J3-5REVWHT/BLK
    J3-1B+YEL
    J3-8B+(none printed)
    J1-4BRUSH ACT +PINK
    J1-5BRUSH ACT -GRA
    J2-2B-BRN
    J2-3ACT POS 0 (RETRACTED)(to S2, POS 0 SW)
    J2-11ACT POS 1 (MIDDLE)(to S1, POS 1 SW)
    J2-12ACT POS 2 / BATT CHGR COMM (EXTENDED)WHT/BLU (R3 3.9k, to S0, POS 2 SW)
    J1-1+ CHEMICAL PUMPRED/YEL
    J1-3- CHEMICAL PUMPBLU/GRA
    J3-3BRUSH REMOVE CONTACTORGRA/BLK
    J3-12VACUUM CONTACTORGRA/RED
    J3-13BRUSH CONTACTORGRA/ORG
    J3-11SOLUTIONGRA/BRN
    J1-8, J2-1, J2-7, J2-8, J3-2B-BLK
    J2-10BRUSH SENSEYEL/ORG
    J2-9VACUUM SENSEYEL/RED

    Speed controller A2 connections as drawn

    PinLabel on drawingWire colors printed (left to right)
    J4-5KEY SW INBRN
    B+B+(none printed)
    B-B-BLK
    J4-3AUX2 OUT(none printed)
    J4-10STATUS OUT(none printed)
    J4-11AUX3 OUT(none printed)
    J4-9SPEED LMT WIPERPINK, BRN
    J4-2THROTTLE HIGH REFYEL, WHT
    J4-1THROTTLE WIPERBRN, BLU
    J4-8THROTTLE LOW REFWHT, BLK
    J5-2AUX1 OUTWHT
    J4-130 VOLTS OUTGRA
    J4-12REV SWITCH INPINK
    M1Motor, wheeldriveGRN
    M2Motor, wheeldriveGRA

    Notes

    1. Ref drawing 56383890 diagram AXP wiring.
    2. Connectors with X00X are TrackClean connections.
    3. If TrackClean option is installed, refer to TrackClean connections and either detail A or B.
    4. Refer to charger connections for onboard charger configurations.
    5. Contactors will have the sheet number, then grid location of their second half next to their symbol.
    6. See key switch detail for track clean connections.
    7. Reference 56384627 and 56384628 for track clean schematics.
    8. Used for reverse switch on ST machine

    TrackClean connections (optional)

    ConnectionFunction (wire color)
    X001B+ (RED)
    X002B- (BLUE)
    X003SCRUB (WHITE)
    X004KEY SWITCH (BROWN)
    X005VACUUM (GRAY)
    X006DRIVE (PINK)
    X007, X008, X009SEE DETAIL DIAGRAMS

    TrackClean key switch details

    Detail A - with access control: the drawing labels the SW, SPST key (S3) pins 1 and 2, X004, X007 (NO CONN.), X008 and X009 with BRN (MACHINE) wires and an ORN wire, and the IMMOBILIZER RELAY.

    Detail B - without access control: the drawing labels the SW, SPST key (S3) pins 1 and 2, X004, and the wires BRN (MACHINE), BRN (MACHINE) and BRN (TRACKCLEAN).

    Charger options

    OptionDrawing label
    Option 1Charger S.P.E.
    Option 2Charger Delta Q with LED
    Option 3Jumper X83 (J6), no charger

    Revisions

    RevECODateDFTMAPPDChange
    AA-103974-17-14PMOWCRRelease
    BA-106397-03-14JDKPMORedrawn into Orcad. Update: assy from 56383890 to 56112E05, notes 1, 2, and 3. Add: charger options & TrackClean connections, TrackClean taps, contactor indicators, notes 4 & 5. Mod: symbol L1 and R3
    CA-1169010-05-15MGKWKAdd: BLK wire to M5, junction to M3 & M4, X004, key switch detail
    DA-1168601-21-16SMJSMJUpdate: A2, AUX2 OUT J4-3 was J4-9. Add: note 8
    EA-1191102-09-16MGMGUpdate: TrackClean connections (detail A, detail B)

    Drawing title: Diagram-ladder AXP. Drawing 56383889, rev E, size D, assy 56112E05, first used on SC750 AXP, sheet 1 of 1. Drawn 4-16-14 PMO, checked 4-16-14 WCR. Nilfisk-Advance, Inc., Plymouth, Minnesota 55447-3408.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 66, used with permission. SES ref PF-L3IJ-P275‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​​‌‌‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠​‌‍⁠​‌‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 66 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring diagram - ST, 56112180 Rev C, Early (before SN 4000077687)

    Ladder-style wiring diagram, drawing 56112180 Rev C, for early ST machines, showing the battery, fuse F1, circuit breakers, optional S.P.E. on-board battery charger, control board A1 with the vacuum, scrub and solution rocker switches, PG Drives speed controller A2, contactors, motors and optional hour meter
    Wiring diagram, ST, 56112180 Rev C (early)

    Printed ratings and model

    Fuse F1, 150 A. Battery, 24 VDC. Circuit breaker CB1, 30 A. Circuit breaker CB2, 10 A. Optional on-board battery charger S.P.E. model HF2-UI24V25A. A2 is the PG Drives speed controller, model i24-70. R3 is 3.9K, R4 is 4.75K and R2 is the 100K speed limit pot. Contactor, vacuum (K1), 21.2 A.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍‌‌​​‍​​‍​‍⁠​​‌​‍​⁠‍‌‍

    Notes

    1. When on_board charger is used, remove BRN wire from key SW. Connect to BRN wire from battery charger & replace with WHT/BRN wire from charger. Also, disconnect YEL/BRN wire at key switch from BRN wire & connect to YEL wire.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 67, used with permission. SES ref PF-RBXF-NVML‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍‌‌​​‍​​‍​‍⁠​​‌​‍​⁠‍‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 67 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring diagram - ST, 56383366 Rev E, Late (since SN 4000077687)

    Ladder-style wiring diagram, drawing 56383366 Rev E, for late ST machines, with the vacuum, scrub and solution rocker switches, traction and reverse switches, TrackClean connections, key switch details A and B, and charger options 1, 2 and 3
    Wiring diagram, ST, 56383366 Rev E (late)

    Printed ratings and model

    Fuse F1, 150 A. Battery, 24 Vdc. Circuit breaker CB1, 30 A. Circuit breaker CB2, 10 A. Inline fuse F2, 3A. Contactor, vacuum (K1), 21.2 A. A2 is the PG Drives speed controller, model i24-70. R3 is 3.9k, R4 is 4.75K and R2 is the 100K speed limit pot.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‍‌‌⁠‌‍⁠‍​‌⁠⁠‍‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠

    Control board A1 connections as drawn

    PinLabel on drawingWire color printed
    J3-14KEY SWITCHBRN
    J3-4CHARGER INTERLOCKBRN
    J3-6FOR/REVWHT/RED
    J3-7STATUSWHT/ORG
    J3-5REVWHT/BLK
    J3-1B+YEL
    J3-8B+(none printed)
    J5-7VAC ONORG/BRN
    J5-6VAC OFFORG/RED
    J5-10SCRUB INCORG/YEL
    J5-8SCRUB DECORG/GRN
    J5-2SOLUTION INCORG/BLU
    J5-4SOLUTION DECORG/GRY
    J5-1B-ORG/BLK
    J1-4BRUSH ACT +RED
    J1-5BRUSH ACT -GRA
    J2-2B-BRN
    J2-3ACT POS 0 (RETRACTED)(to S2, POS 0 SW)
    J2-11ACT POS 1 (MIDDLE)(to S1, POS 1 SW)
    J2-12ACT POS 2 / BATT CHGR COMM (EXTENDED)WHT/BLU (R3 3.9k, to S0, POS 2 SW)
    J3-12VACUUM CONTACTORGRA/RED
    J3-13BRUSH CONTACTORGRA/ORG
    J3-11SOLUTIONGRA/BRN
    J1-8, J2-1, J2-7, J2-8, J3-2B-BLK
    J2-10BRUSH SENSEYEL/ORG
    J2-9VACUUM SENSEYEL/RED

    Speed controller A2 connections as drawn

    PinLabel on drawingWire colors printed (left to right)
    J4-5KEY SW INBRN
    B+B+(none printed)
    B-B-BLK
    J4-9AUX2 OUT(none printed)
    J4-10STATUS OUT(none printed)
    J4-11AUX3 OUT(none printed)
    J4-1 (upper, no function label)(S4 and S5, SW, TRACTION)BLU, BLU
    J4-2THROTTLE HIGH REFBLK, WHT
    J4-1THROTTLE WIPERBRN, BRN
    J4-8THROTTLE LOW REFWHT, BLK
    J5-2AUX1 OUTWHT
    J4-130 VOLTS OUTGRA, GRA (to S6, SW, REVERSE)
    J4-12REV SWITCH INPINK, PINK
    M1Motor, wheeldriveGRN
    M2Motor, wheeldriveGRA

    Notes

    1. Ref drawing 56383367 diagram, ST wiring
    2. Connectors with X00X are TrackClean connections or taps
    3. If TrackClean option is installed, see details A, B, C, or D.
    4. Contactors will have the sheet number then grid location of their second half next to their symbol.
    5. Refer to charger connections for onboard charger configurations.
    6. See key switch detail for track clean connection.
    7. Reference 56384627 and 56384628 for track clean schematics.

    TrackClean connections (optional)

    ConnectionFunction (wire color)
    X001B+ (RED)
    X002B- (BLUE)
    X003SCRUB (WHITE)
    X004KEY SWITCH (BROWN)
    X005VACUUM (GRAY)
    X006DRIVE (PINK)
    X007, X008, X009SEE DETAIL DIAGRAMS

    TrackClean key switch details

    Detail A - with access control: the drawing labels the SW, SPST key (S3) pins 1 and 2, X004, X007 (NO CONN.), X008 and X009 with BRN (MACHINE) wires and an ORN wire, and the IMMOBILIZER RELAY.

    Detail B - without access control: the drawing labels the SW, SPST key (S3) pins 1 and 2, X004, and the wires BRN (MACHINE), BRN (MACHINE) and BRN (TRACKCLEAN).

    Charger options

    OptionDrawing label
    Option 1Charger S.P.E.
    Option 2Charger Delta Q with LED
    Option 3Jumper, no charger

    Revisions

    RevECODateDFTMAPPDChange
    AA-093024-22-13PMOHHRelease
    BA-103974-29-14PMOWCRDel: battery charger, note 1. Add: inline fuse
    CA-106397-29-14JDKPMORedrawn into Orcad. Update: notes 2 and 3. Add: charger options & TrackClean connections, TrackClean taps, contactor indicators, notes 1, 4, & 5. Mod: symbol L1 & R3
    DA-1169010-5-15MGKWKAdd: BLK wire to M5, junction to M3 & M4, X004, key switch detail
    EA-1191102-09-16MGMGUpdate: TrackClean connections (detail A, detail B)

    Drawing title: Diagram-ladder ST. Drawing 56383366, rev E, size D, assy 56112E06, first used on SC750 ST, sheet 1 of 1. Drawn 4-22-13 PMO, checked 4-22-13 HH. Nilfisk-Advance, Inc., Plymouth, Minnesota 55447-3408.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 68, used with permission. SES ref PF-QE33-NWV4‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‍‌‌⁠‌‍⁠‍​‌⁠⁠‍‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 68 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring harness configuration diagram - Non-ST, 56112171 Rev D, Early (before SN 4000077687)

    Wiring harness configuration diagram, drawing 56112171 Rev D, for early non-ST machines, showing connector numbers X3 to X80, the control board A1 connectors J1, J2 and J3, speed controller A2, contactors K1, K2 and K3, motors, deck actuator and optional laser module
    Wiring harness configuration diagram, non-ST, 56112171 Rev D (early)

    Notes

    1. Wire length tolerance is -.50+1.00 inch. Do not accumulate tolerances.
    2. Connectors - specified connectors shall be used. Terminals and seals intended for use with the specified connector may be used.
    3. Quick connect and ring terminals - similar alternates may be used.
    4. Splices - alternate types of splices may be used as long as they are insulated and sealed.
    5. Conduit and sleeving - equivalent brands of conduit and sleeving may be used.
    6. Cable ties - similar alternates may be used. Quantities are approximate, more or less may be needed.
    7. Crimping for all terminals must comply with UL486
    8. Wiring diagram shown for disc brushes. Leads need to be reversed in polarity on left brush motor (M3) for cylindrical brushes.
    9. Wiring diagram shown without on-board charger. If charger is installed, make make wiring changes as needed. 1. Move wire 022 YEL/BRN to S3 pin 2. 2. Remove 017 BRN from S3 and plug into 010 BRN at X66. 3. Install 009 WHT/BRN into S3 pin 1.
    10. Optional wiring for REV2 deck. M3 left motor white to negative black to positive. M4 right motor white to positive black to negative.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 69, used with permission. SES ref PF-NHR5-WE6Z‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‍‌​‌‌‌​‌⁠‍​​⁠⁠​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 69 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring harness configuration diagram - Non-ST, 56383890 Rev A, Late (since SN 4000077687)

    Framed wiring harness configuration diagram, drawing 56383890 Rev A, for late non-ST machines, with grid letters and numbers around the border and the notes at the bottom left
    Wiring harness configuration diagram, non-ST, 56383890 Rev A (late)

    Notes

    1. Wire length tolerance is -.50+1.00 inch. Do not accumulate tolerances.
    2. Connectors - specified connectors shall be used. Terminals and seals intended for use with the specified connector may be used.
    3. Quick connect and ring terminals - similar alternates may be used.
    4. Splices - alternate types of splices may be used as long as they are insulated and sealed.
    5. Conduit and sleeving - equivalent brands of conduit and sleeving may be used.
    6. Cable ties - similar alternates may be used. Quantities are approximate, more or less may be needed.
    7. Crimping for all terminals must comply with UL486
    8. Wiring diagram shown for disc brushes. Leads need to be reversed in polarity on left brush motor (M3) for cylindrical brushes.
    9. When charger not present plug jumper X83 into J6.
    10. Optional wiring for REV2 deck. M3 left motor white to negative black to positive. M4 right motor white to positive black to negative.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 70, used with permission. SES ref PF-2IFL-2NZB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍‍​​‍‍‍‌⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 70 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring harness configuration diagram - ST, 56112181 Rev C, Early (before SN 4000077687)

    Wiring harness configuration diagram, drawing 56112181 Rev C, for early ST machines, showing the vacuum, scrub and solution switches S7, S8 and S9 at the top, traction switches S4 and S5, speed limit pot R2, reverse switch S6, control board A1 and speed controller A2
    Wiring harness configuration diagram, ST, 56112181 Rev C (early)

    Notes

    1. Wiring diagram shown for disc brushes. Leads need to be flipped in polarity on left brush motor for cylindrical brushes.
    2. Wiring diagram shown without on-board charger. If charger is installed, make make wiring changes as needed. 1. Move wire 022 YEL/BRN to S3 pin 2. 2. Remove 017 BRN from S3 and plug into 010 BRN at X66. 3. Install 009 WHT/BRN into S3 pin 1.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 71, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZPTT-TUAL‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‌‌‍⁠​‍⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‌‌‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 71 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring harness configuration diagram - ST, 56383367 Rev B, Late (since SN 4000077687)

    Framed wiring harness configuration diagram, drawing 56383367 Rev B, for late ST machines, with the vacuum, scrub and solution switches S7, S8 and S9 at the top, grid letters and numbers around the border and notes at the bottom
    Wiring harness configuration diagram, ST, 56383367 Rev B (late)

    Notes

    1. Wiring diagram shown for disc brushes. Leads need to be flipped in polarity on left brush motor for cylindrical brushes.
    2. K2 contactor changed to SPST
    3. K3 relay not installed in socket
    4. Reference drawing 56383366 diagram-ladder ST
    5. Place bidirectional diode (LITTLEFUSE P6KE36CA) between wires 045 pink and 046 gray on connector X1
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 72, used with permission. SES ref PF-FT6J-VIFX‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠​‍​‌‍⁠​‌⁠‍‌‍‍‍‍‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 72 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    TrackClean connections, with access control 56384628 Rev A

    TrackClean schematic, drawing 56384628 Rev A: the TrackClean ME401-9 unit wired to connectors X001 to X009, with a 1 amp fuse in the B+ line, an immobilizer relay and the key reader
    TrackClean schematic with reader, 56384628 Rev A

    Connections as drawn

    Machine side labelConnectorWire colorTrackClean ME401-9 terminal
    B+X001RED3 (B+)
    B-X002BLUE4 (B-)
    KEY SWITCHX004BROWN2 (INPUT 2)
    SCRUBX003WHITE1 (INPUT 1)
    VACUUMX005GRAY11 (INPUT 3)
    DRIVEX006PINK12 (INPUT 4)
    BYPASSX007BROWN(see drawing)
    MACHINE SUPPLYX008ORANGE(see drawing)
    MACHINE SUPPLYX009ORANGE(see drawing)
    OUTPUT(none)YELLOW9 (OUTPUT)
    READER(none)(none printed)READER

    The B+ line has a 1 AMP fuse. The drawing also shows the IMMOBILIZER RELAY.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌​‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​‍​‌‍

    Notes

    1. To bypass immobilizer, disconnect machine wire(s) from X008 and X009 and connect to X007.

    Drawing title: Schematic-W/RDR-SC750 TC. Drawing 56384628, rev A (ECO A-11690, 10/8/15, KWK, release), size B, assy 56384092, first used on SC750/800, sheet 1 of 1. Nilfisk-Advance, Inc., Plymouth, Minnesota 55447-3408, and Springdale, AR 72764.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 73, used with permission. SES ref PF-TAOQ-BS64‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌​‌⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​‍​‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 73 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    TrackClean electrical connections, without access control 56384627 Rev A

    TrackClean schematic, drawing 56384627 Rev A: the TrackClean ME401-9 unit wired to connectors X001, X002, X003, X004, X005 and X006, with a 1 amp fuse in the B+ line and nothing connected to the OUTPUT and READER terminals
    TrackClean schematic without reader, 56384627 Rev A

    Connections as drawn

    Machine side labelConnectorWire colorTrackClean ME401-9 terminal
    B+X001RED3 (B+)
    B-X002BLUE4 (B-)
    KEY SWITCHX004BROWN2 (INPUT 2)
    SCRUBX003WHITE1 (INPUT 1)
    VACUUMX005GRAY11 (INPUT 3)
    DRIVEX006PINK12 (INPUT 4)
    OUTPUT(none)(no wire)9 (OUTPUT)
    READER(none)(no wire)READER

    The B+ line has a 1 AMP fuse.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‌​​‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠​​⁠‍‌⁠‌​

    Drawing title: Schematic-W/O RDR-SC750 TC. Drawing 56384627, rev A (ECO A-11690, 10/8/15, KWK, release), size B, assy 56384626, first used on SC750/800, sheet 1 of 1. Notes: none printed. Nilfisk-Advance, Inc., Plymouth, Minnesota 55447-3408, and Springdale, AR 72764.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 74, used with permission. SES ref PF-M6WC-H37H‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‌​​‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠​​⁠‍‌⁠‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 74 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Options and accessories

    In shortThis chapter covers the optional kits: battery fill indicator, battery watering kit, hour meter, on-board battery charger, parking brake, laser and TrackClean. The kits are described on pages 75 to 78.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌‍‌‌​‍‍‌⁠⁠​

    Battery fill indicator

    The Battery Fill Indicator provides a quick visual indication of when one of the battery cells is low and needs water added. It is installed in place of one of the battery fill caps. The wire lead goes to the battery negative terminal. When the level is Okay, the green LED is lit.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌‍‌‌​‍‍‌⁠⁠​

    Battery fill indicator on a wood bench: a gray fill cap with a green LED and a black wire lead ending in a ring terminal
    Battery fill indicator
    Battery fill indicator installed in place of a fill cap on a battery, with the green LED lit
    Fill indicator installed on a battery

    Battery watering kit

    The battery watering kit provides a convenient way to add water from a jug into all battery cells at once. Each battery has a manifold that replaces the fill caps. The manifolds are connected with rubber hoses to one another and to a fill port. A separate filler tool is connected to the fill port on one end and the other end goes into a container of distilled water. Squeezing and releasing the bulb pumps the water into all of the batteries simultaneously. As each battery cell becomes full, a shut off valve closes in its battery cap. Once all of the valves are closed, the pump bulb will feel hard since it can no longer pump water.

    Battery watering kit in use on the batteries: a hand squeezing the pump bulb, with arrows from the labels “Manifold” and “Fill Port” to the manifold on the batteries and to the fill port on the machine
    Battery watering kit: manifold and fill port
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 75, used with permission. SES ref PF-IBBG-MO63‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‌‌‌⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌‍‌‌​‍‍‌⁠⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 75 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Hour meter

    The hour meter keeps track of the run time of the scrub motors.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‌‌⁠‍⁠​‍‌‍‍‍​‍‍‍​​​​‍‌

    On-board battery charger

    An optional on-board battery charger is available. It attaches to the bottom of the machine. See the Electrical System chapter for more information. Early models used an S.P.E. charger. Later models use a Delta-Q charger. Early models can be retrofitted to use the Delta-Q charger.

    Underside of the machine showing the on-board battery charger, a finned black aluminum unit, with an arrow from the label “Battery Charger”
    On-board battery charger

    Wiring for on-board charger

    When the S.P.E charger is installed, the machine wiring at the Key Switch must be modified for the “interlock” circuit to function properly. See the Electrical System chapter for more information.

    To modify the Key Switch Wiring: (See Instruction Sheet Form No. 56090019)

    1. Move wire 022 (YEL/BRN) from Key Switch pin 1 to Key Switch pin 2.
    2. Remove wire 017 (BRN) from the Key Switch and plug it into wire 010 (BRN) at connector X66.
    3. Install wire 009 (WHT/BRN) on the Key Switch pin 1.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 76, used with permission. SES ref PF-TZAN-EXRI‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍‌‌⁠‍⁠​‍‌‍‍‍​‍‍‍​​​​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 76 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wiring for on-board charger

    Diagram “Wiring Without Onboard Battery Charger”: B+ through CB 2 and YEL 019 to key switch pin 2, key switch pin 1 to BRN 017 to the Drive Motor Controller and to J3-4, YEL/BRN 022 to J3-14, and YEL 019 also to J3-1 and J3-8 of the Main Machine Controller
    Wiring without onboard battery charger
    Diagram “Wiring With Onboard Battery Charger”, marked “S.P.E Charger Only”: WHT/BRN 009 from key switch pin 1 to the interlock relay in the battery charger, BRN 010 from the interlock relay to X66 where it joins BRN 017 to the Drive Motor Controller and J3-4, and YEL/BRN 022 from key switch pin 2 to J3-14
    Wiring with onboard battery charger (S.P.E. charger only)

    Key switch wiring as drawn

    WireWithout on-board chargerWith on-board charger (S.P.E Charger Only)
    YEL 019CB 2 to key switch pin 2, J3-1 and J3-8CB 2 to key switch pin 2, J3-1 and J3-8
    YEL/BRN 022Key switch pin 1 to J3-14Key switch pin 2 to J3-14
    BRN 017Key switch pin 1 to the Drive Motor Controller and J3-4X66 to the Drive Motor Controller and J3-4
    WHT/BRN 009Not shownKey switch pin 1 to the interlock relay in the battery charger
    BRN 010Not shownInterlock relay to X66
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 77, used with permission. SES ref PF-6IQ6-EYUK‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‌⁠‍‌​‍‍​⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 77 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Parking brake

    The optional parking brake kit has a manually operated lever that presses a plunger against a drive wheel to act as a brake.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠​‍‌‍‌​‍‌‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠‌‌‌‌‌

    Optional parking brake kit: a manually operated lever with a red handle mounted beside a drive wheel, with its plunger pointing at the wheel
    Parking brake kit

    Laser

    The laser provides a visual cue of the cleaning path width and provides an early warning that a machine is approaching.

    View of the machine from behind showing a red laser line on the floor ahead of it, with an arrow from the label “Laser Line”
    Laser line on the floor
    Laser unit mounted under the machine body on a bracket, with an arrow from the label “Laser Unit”
    Laser unit

    TrackClean

    TrackClean is an add on option that provides machine location and operation data to the machine owner. It may have a magnetic key reader which will prevent machine operation unless a valid magnetic key is inserted. Several additional electrical connections are made when the kit is installed to monitor machine operation in order to provide data. See wiring and connection diagrams in the electrical system chapter (page 65 to page 74).

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 78, used with permission. SES ref PF-FN2V-GQYE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌​⁠​‍‌‍‌​‍‌‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠‌‌‌‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 78 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Recovery system

    Functional description

    In shortA vacuum motor pulls air and dirty water from the squeegee into the recovery tank. A floating ball seats when the tank is full, the motor current drops, and the controller shuts the vacuum motor off. The vacuum motor is switched by relay K1 (see page 80) and the controller watches its current through a sense wire.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍⁠​‌‍⁠‍​‌‌​‍‌⁠‍⁠‌‍‌⁠​‍

    The job of the recovery system is to remove the dirty water from the floor and store it in the recovery tank. The dirty water is then disposed of. Dirt and water are lifted off the floor into the recovery tank by airflow created by a vacuum motor. The wastewater and air enter the vacuum system at the squeegee tool, through notches in the front squeegee blade. The air and wastewater move through the squeegee vacuum hose at high speed until it reaches the recovery tank. The heavier water falls to the bottom of the recovery tank. The airflow continues through the vacuum fan inlet port, vacuum motor and exhaust port. A debris tray inside the recovery tanks helps to redirect the water downward and catches large particles. No wastewater ever actually moves through the vacuum motor, just the working air. A floating ball in a cage seals off the vacuum port when the tank is full to protect the vacuum motor from water ingestion. When the float ball seats, the amp draw of the motor is reduced and the Main Machine Controller shuts off the vacuum motor. The squeegee is raised and lowered manually using the squeegee lift lever. Springs apply downward pressure on the squeegee.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍⁠​‌‍⁠‍​‌‌​‍‌⁠‍⁠‌‍‌⁠​‍

    Here is how the vacuum motor circuit works. The relay winding is fed battery voltage on terminal 85. The other side of the relay coil (terminal 86) is connected to a switch inside the controller. To energize the relay, the controller closes the switch which completes the path to B-. The relay contact terminal 30 is connected to B+. When the relay is energized, the contacts close connecting 30 to 87 which sends battery voltage to the vacuum motor. Since the other side of the motor is connected to battery negative, the motor turns on. The Main Machine Controller also monitors the current draw of the vacuum motor via a “vacuum motor sense” wire. The controller has an internal “voltmeter” that measures the voltage difference (drop) between the sense wire and battery negative. A calibrated ground wire of a specific size and length is used for the motor ground. At a given amperage flow, there is a correlating voltage drop. As the amperage increases the voltage drop also increases. The controller translates the voltage drop measured into amperage.

    Vacuum motor control circuit: B+ to relay contact terminal 30 and, through the key switch, to relay coil terminal 85; coil terminal 86 to a switch to B- inside the Main Machine Controller; relay contact terminal 87 to the vacuum motor, whose other side goes to B-; and a sense circuit from the motor to a “voltmeter” inside the controller
    Vacuum motor control circuit
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 79, used with permission. SES ref PF-FYNG-DXS5‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍⁠​‌‍⁠‍​‌‌​‍‌⁠‍⁠‌‍‌⁠​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 79 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    The vacuum contactor (relay) is turned on when the following inputs are met:‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‌​‌‌⁠​​⁠‌‍‍‍⁠​‌‌⁠⁠‍‌⁠

    • Operator request
      • Scrub On/Off switch has been pressed or
      • Vacuum/Wand switch has been pressed
    • Machine Moving Signal is received from the Drive Motor Controller

    The vacuum relay is de-energized when the operator turns off the scrub system following a timed delay.

    Component locations

    Rear of the machine with arrows from the labels “Recovery Tank Drain Hose” and “Squeegee Vacuum Hose” to the two hoses
    Recovery tank drain hose and squeegee vacuum hose, rear view
    Side of the machine with arrows from the labels “Vacuum Motor Cover”, “Recovery Tank Drain Hose” and “Squeegee Vacuum Hose” to the round white vacuum motor cover and the two hoses
    Vacuum motor cover and hoses
    Recovery tank with its lid open, with arrows from the labels “Vacuum Motor (Below)”, “Debris Tray”, “Recovery Tank”, “Gasket”, “Recovery Tank Lid” and “Cage and Ball Float”
    Recovery tank, lid, gasket, debris tray and float cage
    Electrical compartment with an arrow from the label “Vacuum Relay K1” to the relay
    Vacuum relay K1
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 80, used with permission. SES ref PF-BWPY-UPCB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​​‌​‌‌⁠​​⁠‌‍‍‍⁠​‌‌⁠⁠‍‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 80 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Troubleshooting

    Vacuum motor does not turn on (scrub function works)

    Possible Causes:‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌​‍​‌‌​‌‌⁠‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠

    • Defective Vacuum Motor
    • Defective Vacuum Motor Contactor (Relay) K1
    • Defective Wiring
    • Defective

    Insufficient water pickup

    In shortPoor pickup can be restricted air flow, damaged squeegees, an air leak or a weak vacuum motor. Start with a visual check, then test with a vacuum gauge, part number 56205281, and a one inch open-hole adapter (see page 82). The reading should be within 10% of specs both with and without the adapter.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌​‍​‌‌​‌‌⁠‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠

    Good water pick up performance depends on the proper amount of air flowing through the squeegee pickup tool. Air entering the vacuum system before the pickup tool will reduce its ability to pick up water. Anything that restricts the movement of air through the system will also reduce its ability to pick up water.

    Possible Causes:

    • Restricted air flow
    • Damaged squeegees
    • Air leaks
      • Recovery tank lid gasket is not sealing
      • Cracked squeegee vacuum hose
      • Cracked recovery tank
    • Vacuum motor is weak

    Begin with a good visual inspection of the system. Check the condition of the squeegees and the recovery hose. Take the recovery hose off and rinse it out. Check the recover tank cover gasket condition. Repair any problems found.

    If no visual problems are found, test the system using a vacuum gauge PN 56205281 and open- hole adapter. (See the Special Tools Section below. The adapter can be made from a piece of PVC pipe.)

    1. Remove the vacuum hose from the squeegee tool.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 81, used with permission. SES ref PF-GWVE-FLBQ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌​‍​‌‌​‌‌⁠‍‍‌‌​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 81 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Hold the vacuum gauge against the end of the hose and turn on the vacuum motor. Note the reading on the gauge. If it is within 10% of specs, go to the next step. If it is too low, check for air leaks in the system.
      Hand holding the vacuum gauge against the end of the vacuum hose, with the needle visible on the dial
      Vacuum gauge held against the hose end
    2. Install a one inch open-hole adapter between the hose end and the vacuum gauge.
      Hand holding the vacuum gauge on top of a one inch open-hole adapter fitted to the hose end, with the needle visible on the dial
      Vacuum gauge on the open-hole adapter
    3. Turn the vacuum motor on and measure the vacuum. If it is within 10% of the specs, the vacuum system is working properly. If the reading is too low, check for a restriction in the system.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 82, used with permission. SES ref PF-I4G3-ZOKY‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​​​⁠‌‌‍‌‌​‍‌‌‌‍​⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 82 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    Vacuum motor

    In shortTurn the key off, drain and lift the recovery tank, cut the tie straps and unplug the motor, then take off the cover and pull the motor and its foam pieces (see page 84). Do not run the motor without the cooling fan guard in place.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​⁠‌⁠‌‍‌‍​​⁠‍​​‍‍​​‌⁠​​
    1. Turn off key switch, drain recovery tank and lift recovery tank up.
    2. Cut tie straps securing wiring and disconnect vacuum motor electrical connection.
      A hand cutting the tie strap on the vacuum motor electrical connector with side cutters, with an arrow from the label “Cut Strap and Disconnect”
      Cut strap and disconnect the vacuum motor connector
    3. Remove vacuum motor cover mounting screws and cover. Note: The vacuum motor cooling fan guard may come off the end of the motor. Do not run the motor without the guard in place. Make sure that it is put back on during reassembly.
      A hand using a screwdriver to remove a mounting screw from the white vacuum motor cover
      Removing the vacuum motor cover screws
      Vacuum motor with the cover removed and held below it, with an arrow from the label “Cooling Fan Guard Came Off” to the fan end of the motor
      Cooling fan guard came off with the cover
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 83, used with permission. SES ref PF-SAN5-B25R‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​⁠‌⁠‌‍‌‍​​⁠‍​​‍‍​​‌⁠​​
    Form Number 56043150Page 83 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Remove vacuum motor and foam pieces. Pay attention to how the foam pieces are positioned.
      Hand holding the vacuum motor as it is pulled out of its foam sleeve in the housing
      Removing the vacuum motor
      The removed vacuum motor on a bench with its three foam pieces laid out around it: a ring on top, a sleeve on the left and a curved sheet on the right
      Vacuum motor and foam pieces
    2. Reassemble in reverse order.
      1. Install the cooling fan guard if it is not in place.
      2. Take care to position all the foam pieces correctly.
        Hand pressing the motor into its foam, with an arrow from the label “Cooling Fan Guard” to the guard on the end of the motor
        Cooling fan guard on the motor end
        Hand holding the white vacuum motor cover in place over the motor
        Vacuum motor cover in place
      3. Make sure the ends of the vacuum motor are seated correctly. (If you have difficulty seating all of the pieces, remove the recovery tank and place it upside down so that the vacuum motor goes in vertically. This way you will not be fighting gravity.)
      4. Route the vacuum motor wiring lead in the slot of vacuum motor cover and install foam cooling fan filter.
        Hand installing the round black foam cooling fan filter in the vacuum motor cover, with arrows from the labels “Wiring in Slot” to the slot in the cover and “Cooling Fan Filter” to the filter
        Wiring in the cover slot and cooling fan filter
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 84, used with permission. SES ref PF-JJOJ-JNQ6‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌‍‌⁠‌​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠⁠​‌‍‍‍‍​‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 84 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Specifications

    Vacuum motor

    .66 HP (490 watt) three-stage‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‍⁠⁠​‍​​⁠‌‍⁠‍‌‌⁠‌‌​‌⁠‌⁠

    Vacuum performance

    • Blocked off - measured at squeegee hose end 51.2 in H2O minimum
    • With 1 inch hole measured approximately 8.7 in H2O minimum

    Vacuum motor amp draw

    With everything assembled and squeegee off the floor - 17 Amps

    Special tools

    • Water Lift Gauge, part number 56205281
    Water lift gauge: a round dial gauge marked in inches of water vacuum and kilopascals, mounted on a black rubber cup
    Water lift gauge
    • 1 inch open hole adaptor – This can be fabricated from a short section of PVC pipe.
    A short length of pipe with a round 1 inch hole cut in its side, set on a base
    1 inch open hole adaptor
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 85, used with permission. SES ref PF-W5VI-MPNQ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​‍⁠⁠​‍​​⁠‌‍⁠‍‌‌⁠‌‌​‌⁠‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 85 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Scrub system – cylindrical

    Functional description

    In shortThe Main Machine Controller runs the brush motors through the brush contactor once the key is on, the operator asks to scrub and the Drive Motor Controller sends the machine moving signal. An electric actuator raises and lowers the scrub head, and on this cylindrical system there is no extreme pressure mode. If you need help with this system, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​‍‌

    The scrub system moves the scrub head up and down and turns the scrub motors on and off at the operator’s request, to provide floor scrubbing action. The brushes spin toward one another at the bottom. The head is moved up and down by an electric actuator motor that has integrated position switches. The weight of the scrub head provides the downward pressure for scrubbing. The actuator linkage is slotted to allow the brush head to “float” when going over low and high spots on the floor. A spring is used to lift just a bit of weight in order to obtain optimal scrub pressure weight. Note: The cylindrical scrub system does not have an “extreme pressure” mode.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​‍‌

    • The Main Machine Controller energizes the brush solenoid to turn on the brush motors when the following inputs have been met:
      • Key switch on
      • Operator request
      • Machine moving signal (FOR/REV) is received from the Drive Motor Controller (A2 PG Drives Speed Controller)
        • Approximately 24 volts received from the main controller (J3 Pin 6) is switched to battery negative by the Drive Motor Controller, dropping the voltage to 0 volts.

    Here is how the circuit works for the scrub motors: The Main Machine Controller turns on the scrub motors indirectly by energizing the Brush Contactor. The brush contactor coil is fed battery positive voltage through the key switch. The voltage goes through the coil and on to the controller. Inside the controller, it switches the circuit to battery negative to energize the relay. When the relay energizes, positive battery voltage is applied through its contacts to the brush motors. Since the other side of the motors is connected to battery negative, they turn on.

    The Main Machine Controller also monitors the amount of electrical current (Amps) that is flowing through the brush motor ground circuit. If it is higher or lower than expected a fault code will be set. It monitors the amperage indirectly on a “sense” wire by measuring the difference in voltage (Voltage Drop) between a point near the motors and the main battery negative terminal. As actual current increases, the voltage drop measured increases. The controller then converts the voltage value to “Amps”. The monitoring circuit relies on a calibrated ground wire that is a specific gauge and length.

    An electric actuator is used to move the scrub head up and down. The actuator has a DC permanent magnet electric motor which is driven by the Main Machine Controller. The motor turns a threaded shaft. When the threaded shaft turns, it moves a threaded rod up and down. Since the rod is attached to the deck, it moves the deck up and down.

    Inside the actuator housing, there are also three position switches which are monitored by the Main Machine Controller. One for the “retracted” position, one for the “middle” position (Normal scrub pressure) and one for the “Extended” position (Extreme scrub pressure). Each switch is normally closed. The threaded rod has a collar on it that opens each switch as it passes by it. When the Main Machine Controller sees the middle position switch open, it knows that the deck is in the normal scrub position. If that was its goal position, the controller turns off the motor to stop the deck in that position.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 86, used with permission. SES ref PF-RFVN-2QTH‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 86 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Here is how the circuit works for the actuator. The Main Machine Controller directly drives the brush head actuator motor. It applies system voltage across the two actuator motor wires to move the motor up. It reverses polarity to move the motor down. Each position switch receives a 5 volt feed through a resistor from the controller which returns back to battery negative on a common wire to connector J2 pin 2. The controller has “internal voltmeters” which monitor the signal voltage of each switch circuit. When the switch is closed, the voltage signal is approximately 0 volts. When the switch is open, the voltage is approximately 5 volts.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌​‌​‌⁠⁠‌​​‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍

    1. Deck up - Retracted Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    2. Normal Scrub mode - Middle Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    3. Extreme Scrub mode is not used on Cylindrical Deck
    Disassembled deck actuator laid out on a bench. Labels: Motor, Threaded Shaft, Collar, Threaded Rod, Rod Movement (arrow along the rod), and below the circuit board the Retracted Position Switch, Middle Position Switch and Extended Position Switch
    Disassembled deck actuator

    Note: The actuator “extended” position switch circuit is unique because it is also used as a communication line between the Main Machine Controller and the battery charger. The addition of the battery charger on the circuit drops the 5v that is normally seen when the switch is open to approximately 3 volts. This is normal.

    When the key is turned off, if the brush head is down, the Main Machine Controller will raise the brush head to the full “up” position. When the operator requests the scrub mode, the controller drives the actuator down until it sees the Middle Position switch open (5v). When the operator turns off the scrub function, the controller drives the actuator motor up until it sees the Retracted Position switch open again (5v). If more than one position switch is open (5v) at a time, the controller does not know which one to believe. It realizes there must be a problem and will not move the actuator.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 87, used with permission. SES ref PF-RPHN-G2PA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌​‌​‌⁠⁠‌​​‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 87 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    Circuit drawing titled Scrub System - Disc and Cylindrical, showing the key switch, brush contactor, brush motors, Brush Head Actuator box, Main Machine Controller box and Drive Motor Controller box.
    Scrub system – disc and cylindrical circuit diagram
    Area of drawingLabels printed there
    Drawing titleScrub System - Disc and Cylindrical
    Top of drawingB+; Key Switch; Brush Contactor; Wht (on the wire to the brush motors); Brush Motors (two, each marked M); B-; Sense Wire
    Brush Head Actuator boxBrush Head Actuator - Shown in retracted position; M (actuator motor); Retracted; Middle; Extended; Wht (on the Retracted line, between the two boxes)
    Main Machine Controller boxMain Machine Controller; B+; B-; B+ (left switch contacts); B- (top switch); 5V (printed three times, one beside each of the Retracted, Middle and Extended lines); B- (centre); B- (bottom left); 24V; V in a circle (five voltmeter symbols)
    Drive Motor Controller boxDrive Motor Controller; B-
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 88, used with permission. SES ref PF-JEQI-SBDI‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌‍⁠‍‌‍‍⁠​⁠‌‌​⁠‍​⁠⁠‌‌⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 88 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Component locations

    • Brush Contactor
    • Brush Drive Motor
    • Motor Drive Pulley
    • Brush Drive Pulley
    Brush head seen from the front left, with labels Brush Drive Motor, Brush Head (dashed outline) and Idler Assembly
    Brush head, brush drive motor and idler assembly
    Side of the machine with the debris hopper labeled, beside the rear wheel
    Debris hopper
    View into the battery compartment area with the brush head actuator labeled
    Brush head actuator
    Brush head side plate with the motor drive pulley, brush drive pulley and brush drive belt labeled
    Motor drive pulley, brush drive pulley and brush drive belt
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 89, used with permission. SES ref PF-I2XI-KOUS‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍​​‍‌​​⁠⁠⁠‌‍‍‍​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 89 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    Electrical compartment with the brush contactor labeled, mounted at upper right among the wiring
    Brush contactor
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 90, used with permission. SES ref PF-XHXG-OBLE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​​⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‍‍‍​‌​‌‌‍‌⁠‌‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 90 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Troubleshooting

    In shortIf the scrub motors will not run, check the brush contactor, the wiring, the Main Machine Controller and the machine moving signal from the Drive Motor Controller. If the brush head will not raise or lower, causes include binding in the actuator linkage, then the actuator motor and its three position switches, which are tested with an ohmmeter (continued on page 92).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍​​​‍‌‌⁠​‌‌⁠​​

    Scrub motors do not turn on

    Possible Causes‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍​​​‍‌‌⁠​‌‌⁠​​

    • Brush Contactor
      • Open or shorted winding
      • Burned contacts
    • Wiring
    • Main Machine Controller – Not energizing the brush contactor.
    • Drive Motor Controller – Not providing “machine moving signal”

    Brush head will not raise or lower

    Possible Causes

    • Mechanical binding for the actuator linkage
    • Brush Head Actuator – Check both the motor and the position switches. Only one position switch should be open at a time and it should open at the correct position.
      • Actuator Motor

        Unplug the actuator connector and momentarily supply fused 24v power and ground to the two motor terminals to see if the motor will operate. (Machine harness wire color Pink wire and Gray wire). Reverse the polarity to drive it in both directions. If the motor will not drive in both directions, replace the actuator. If it does drive in both directions, proceed to check the position switches.

      • Position Switches

        Access the Main Machine Controller and unplug the electrical connectors.

        Check the retracted position switch.

        • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
        • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the White wire at the J2 connector pin 3.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 91, used with permission. SES ref PF-YV4Y-KGG7‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍​​​‍‌‌⁠​‌‌⁠​​
    Form Number 56043150Page 91 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
    • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the retracted position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).

    Check the middle position switch.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‌‌⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍​‌⁠‍​‌⁠‌​​

    • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
    • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Yellow wire at the J2 connector pin 11.
    • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
    • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the middle position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).

    Check the extended position switch.

    • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
    • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Green wire at the J2 connector pin 12.
    • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
    • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the extended position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    • Wiring
    • Main Machine Controller
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 92, used with permission. SES ref PF-XEWX-JBFE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‌‌⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍​‌⁠‍​‌⁠‌​​
    Form Number 56043150Page 92 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Removal and installation

    In shortTo change a scrub brush, turn the key off and wait for the brush head to rise, disconnect the battery pack connector, then loosen the hand wheel nut so the idler cover can be pulled out and the brush slid out of the housing. Page 94 covers fitting the new brush: slide it in, engage the drive hub flanges, seat the idler cover and tighten the hand wheel nut.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌​‍⁠​‍‍‍‍​⁠⁠​⁠⁠‍‍‍‍‌​‍

    Scrub brush

    1. Turn the key switch off and wait for the Brush Head to rise.
    2. Disconnect the Battery Pack Connector.
    3. Loosen the hand wheel nut several turns until the idle cover lowers far enough that the slots clear and allow the cover to be pulled outward. If the cover is stuck, push down on the hand wheel.
    A hand loosening the hand wheel nut on the idler cover at the end of the brush head
    Loosening the hand wheel nut
    Idler cover removed from the brush head, with the slots in the idler assembly circled and labeled Slots in Idler Assembly, and the hand wheel nut beside it
    Slots in the idler assembly
    1. Pull brush out of housing.
    A hand pulling the red cylindrical brush out of the brush housing
    Pulling the brush out
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 93, used with permission. SES ref PF-6VTW-JAVH‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‌​‍⁠​‍‍‍‍​⁠⁠​⁠⁠‍‍‍‍‌​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 93 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Slide new brush into housing. Rotate and lift the end to engage the drive hub flanges with the slots in the end of the brush.
    End of the brush showing the internal slots that engage the drive hub flanges
    Slots in the end of the brush
    Drive hub with its flanges inside the brush head housing
    Drive hub in the housing
    1. Position idler pulley in brush end and seat the idler cover flat against the brush head
    A hand holding the idler cover against the end of the brush head with the idler pulley in the brush end
    Seating the idler cover
    1. Tighten the hand wheel nut, making sure that the slots in the idle cover line up and engage the brush head.
    Close view of the idler cover edge with the slot circled and labeled Slot, and an arrow labeled Engage Slot Here pointing to the brush head
    Engaging the slot
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 94, used with permission. SES ref PF-RBID-55TF‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠‍‍​​​‌⁠​​​​‌‍⁠​⁠‍​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 94 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Brush drive belt

    The drive belt is a “stretch belt” and may appear “too short”. It is not tensioned with a slotted adjustment but instead is stretched on much like a vacuum cleaner belt.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‍⁠‍‍​‍‌‌‍​⁠‌‍​‍‌​⁠​⁠‌

    1. Remove belt cover.
    2. Pry the brush drive belt off the drive motor pulley using a screw driver.
    3. Install the belt on the brush drive pulley first.
    A hand fitting the belt over the brush drive pulley at the brush head side plate
    Belt on the brush drive pulley
    1. Use a screwdriver to pry the belt onto the motor pulley using a rolling action.
    A screwdriver prying the belt onto the motor pulley, first position
    Prying the belt onto the motor pulley, first view
    A screwdriver prying the belt onto the motor pulley, second position
    Prying the belt onto the motor pulley, second view
    1. If the belt grooves are not quite in place, push on the side of the belt while rotating the pulley until the belt grooves are properly seated in the pulley.
    2. Reinstall the belt cover.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 95, used with permission. SES ref PF-UCUS-VIKV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‍⁠‍‍​‍‌‌‍​⁠‌‍​‍‌​⁠​⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 95 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Brush head actuator

    1. Empty recovery tank.
    2. Press the scrub button to lower the brush head.
    3. If the actuator does not move, slightly raise the brush head with a jack to take tension off of the mounting hardware.
    4. Lift recovery tank up.
    5. Disconnect electrical connector so the actuator will not move and then turn the key off.
    A hand holding the disconnected actuator electrical connector, with the actuator above it
    Actuator electrical connector disconnected
    1. Remove upper and lower fasteners.
    Top of the actuator with the upper fastener circled and labeled Upper Fastener
    Upper fastener
    Bottom of the actuator with the lower fastener circled and labeled Lower Fastener
    Lower fastener
    1. Remove actuator.
    2. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Parts for this job
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 96, used with permission. SES ref PF-F2VM-N3ZA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠​‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍‌‌‌‍‍‌‍⁠⁠‍‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 96 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Brush motor

    1. Remove the rear Scrub Brush.
    2. Remove the Debris Hopper.
    3. Remove the Brush Drive Belt.
    4. Lower Brush Head.
    5. Reconnect Battery Pack Connector.
    6. Turn the key on, press the scrub switch and wait for brush head to lower.
    7. Unplug Brush Head Actuator electrical connector, turn the key off and unplug the Battery Pack connector.
    8. Remove the motor strap.
    Motor strap on the brush head with a wrench on the strap mounting bolt, which is circled and labeled Strap Mounting Bolt
    Strap mounting bolt
    1. Remove the motor end mounting bolts.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 97, used with permission. SES ref PF-ICWY-WQYR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠​‍‍⁠⁠‍​​⁠​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠‍​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 97 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. Partially remove motor for better access to the wiring terminals.
    2. Do not lose the spacer plate.
    Motor partly slid out of the brush head with a hand holding the round spacer plate, labeled Spacer Plate
    Spacer plate
    1. Record the wiring connections so that you will be able to reconnect it properly upon reassembly.
    2. Remove wiring.
    3. Use a backup wrench when removing attaching nuts to prevent the terminals from spinning.
    Two wrenches on the motor terminal, one holding the terminal while the other turns the nut
    Backup wrench on the motor terminal
    1. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 98, used with permission. SES ref PF-YKAE-Y7PI‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌⁠⁠​​‌‍‍‍‌⁠‌​​​​​⁠​⁠⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 98 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Motor carbon brushes

    1. Remove the brush drive motor.
    2. Mark the position of the endplate to the motor casing for reassembly.
    A screwdriver prying at the seam of the motor endplate on the motor casing
    Marking and prying the endplate
    Endplate assembly lifted off the motor, showing the carbon brushes and commutator
    Endplate assembly removed
    1. Remove the 2 through bolts and pry off the endplate assembly.
    2. Replace the carbon brushes.
    3. a. Observe how the springs roll when the brush is pushed back before taking it apart.
    4. b. Remove a brush and spring.
    5. c. Install a new brush and spring into the brush holder. Thread the brush wire lead through the brush holder. Position the back end of the brush in the “cup” of the spring so that the spring will unroll as the brush is pushed back once it is installed.
    A carbon brush with its wire lead, held with a spring
    Carbon brush and spring
    Two brush springs held by fingers, the cup side of one spring marked with a yellow line and labeled Cup side of spring, and the side where the spring unrolls labeled Spring unrolls on this side (held open)
    Brush spring cup side
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 99, used with permission. SES ref PF-SFZ3-ZTFJ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌​‌‍​‌⁠​‍⁠‌‌‍⁠​​⁠‍‍​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 99 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    1. d. Push brush back against the spring and insert a stiff temporary retaining wire (paper clip) through the access hole in the end cover. (Remove silicone sealer from the holes) The wire must go through the holes in the brush holder just in front of the brush to hold the brush back against the spring pressure.
    Brush holder with a finger pushing a brush back against its spring, labeled Push Brush Against Spring, and the retaining wire hole labeled Retaining Wire Hole
    Pushing the brush back against the spring
    Outside of the end cover with a retaining wire inserted through the access hole, circled and labeled Insert Retainer
    Inserting the retainer through the end cover
    Brush holders with two temporary retaining wires in place, labeled Retaining Wire
    Retaining wires in place
    1. Install the other three brushes.
    2. Install the wave washer.
    Wave washer seated on the armature shaft above the commutator
    Wave washer
    1. Install the end cover in stages, aligning the marks made earlier.
    2. a. Install it far enough so that the brushes will contact the commutator when the temporary retaining wires are removed, then remove the wires.
    3. b. Fully seat the end cover.
    4. Install the through bolts.
    5. Seal the retaining wire holes in the end cover with silicone sealant.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 100, used with permission. SES ref PF-I4YV-IDRE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠‍⁠‌‍​‍⁠‍​‍​‍⁠‌‍⁠​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 100 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Specifications

    Scrub motor total amp draw

    Typical total amp draw for both 28 inch and 32 inch decks ranges from 45 Amps to 65 Amps when scrubbing with low solution flow, depending on the type of floor.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌​‌⁠​‌​‍‌​‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍‌‌

    Scrub motor speed

    830-840 RPM

    Scrub force

    80 lb (36.3 kg)

    Brush head actuator amp draw

    Upward with weight of deck - Approximately 1-2 Amps

    Brush contactor

    Winding Resistance – 55 ohms

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 101, used with permission. SES ref PF-FFF3-2OIA‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‌​‌⁠​‌​‍‌​‍⁠​⁠⁠​⁠​‌‍‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 101 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Scrub system, disc

    Functional description

    Scrubbing

    In shortOn the disc system the Main Machine Controller runs the brush motors through the brush contactor, and an electric actuator moves the scrub head. Deck weight gives normal scrub pressure; when extreme pressure is requested the actuator moves down farther so a gas spring adds downward pressure. If you need help with this system, call us at 800-440-6723.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‍‍​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌

    The scrub system moves the scrub head up and down and turns the scrub motors on and off at the operator’s request to provide floor scrubbing action. The discs spin toward the center at the front edge of each disc. The head is moved up and down by an electric actuator motor that has integrated position switches. The weight of the scrub head provides the downward pressure in the normal scrub mode. When extreme pressure is requested, the actuator moves down farther causing a gas spring to exert additional downward pressure on the floor.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‍‍​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌

    The Main Machine Controller energizes the brush solenoid to turn on the brush motors when the following inputs have been met:

    • Key switch on
    • Operator request
    • Machine moving signal (FOR/REV) is received from the Drive Motor Controller (A2 PG Drives Speed Controller)
      • Approximately 24 volts received from the main controller (J3 Pin 6) is switched to battery negative by the Drive Motor Controller, dropping the voltage to 0 volts.

    Here is how the circuit works for the scrub motors. The Main Machine Controller turns on the scrub motors indirectly by energizing the brush contactor. The brush contactor coil is fed battery positive voltage through the key switch. The voltage goes through the coil and on to the controller. Inside the controller, it switches the circuit to battery negative to energize the relay. When the relay energizes, positive battery voltage is applied through its contacts to the brush motors. Since the other side of the motors is connected to battery negative, they turn on.

    The Main Machine Controller also monitors the amount of electrical current (Amps) that is flowing through the brush motor ground circuit. If it is higher or lower than expected, a fault code will be set. It monitors the amperage indirectly on a “sense” wire by measuring the difference in voltage (Voltage Drop) between a point near the motors and the main battery negative terminal. As actual current increases, the voltage drop measured increases. The controller then converts the voltage value to “Amps”. The monitoring circuit relies on a calibrated ground wire that is a specific gauge and length.

    An electric actuator is used to move the scrub head up and down. The actuator has a DC permanent magnet electric motor which is driven by the Main Machine Controller. The motor turns a threaded shaft. When the threaded shaft turns, it moves a threaded rod up and down. Since the rod is attached to the deck, it moves the deck up and down.

    Inside the actuator housing there are also three position switches which are monitored by the Main Machine Controller. One is for the “retracted” position, one for the “middle” position (Normal scrub pressure) and one for the “Extended” position (Extreme scrub pressure). Each switch is normally closed. The threaded rod has a collar on it that opens each switch as it passes by it. When the Main Machine Controller sees the middle position switch open, it knows that the deck is in the normal scrub position. If that was its goal position, the controller turns off the motor to stop the deck in that position.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 102, used with permission. SES ref PF-N2MT-C32I‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌⁠‍‍​‍‍​‌⁠‍‌​‌⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 102 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Here is how the circuit works for the actuator. The Main Machine Controller directly drives the brush head actuator motor. It applies system voltage across the two actuator motor wires to move the motor up. It reverses polarity to move the motor down. Each position switch receives a 5 volt feed through a resistor from the controller, which returns back to battery negative on a common wire to connector J2 pin 2. The controller has “internal voltmeters” which monitor the signal voltage of each switch circuit. When the switch is closed, the voltage signal is approximately 0 volts. When the switch is open, the voltage is approximately 5 volts.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠⁠‌‍​‌⁠​‌‍‌​‍‌‌​⁠​‍​‌

    1. Deck up - Retracted Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    2. Normal Scrub mode - Middle Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    3. Extreme Scrub mode – Extended Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    Disassembled deck actuator laid out on a bench. Labels: Motor, Threaded Shaft, Collar, Threaded Rod, Rod Movement (arrow along the rod), and below the circuit board the Retracted Position Switch, Middle Position Switch and Extended Position Switch
    Disassembled deck actuator

    Note: The actuator “extended” position switch circuit is unique because it is also used as a communication line between the Main Machine Controller and the battery charger. The addition of the battery charger on the circuit drops the 5v that is normally seen when the switch is open to approximately 3 volts. This is normal.

    When the key is turned off, if the brush head is down, the Main Machine Controller will raise the brush head to the full up position. When the operator requests the scrub mode, the controller drives the actuator down until it sees the Middle Position switch open (5v). When the operator turns off the scrub function, the controller drives the actuator motor up until it sees the Retracted Position switch open again (5v). If more than one position switch is open (5v) at a time, the controller does not know which one to believe. It realizes there must be a problem and will not move the actuator.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 103, used with permission. SES ref PF-CPWH-5YG5‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‍⁠⁠‌‍​‌⁠​‌‍‌​‍‌‌​⁠​‍​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 103 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST
    Circuit drawing titled Scrub System - Disc and Cylindrical, showing the key switch, brush contactor, brush motors, Brush Head Actuator box, Main Machine Controller box and Drive Motor Controller box.
    Scrub system – disc and cylindrical circuit diagram
    Area of drawingLabels printed there
    Drawing titleScrub System - Disc and Cylindrical
    Top of drawingB+; Key Switch; Brush Contactor; Wht (on the wire to the brush motors); Brush Motors (two, each marked M); B-; Sense Wire
    Brush Head Actuator boxBrush Head Actuator - Shown in retracted position; M (actuator motor); Retracted; Middle; Extended; Wht (on the Retracted line, between the two boxes)
    Main Machine Controller boxMain Machine Controller; B+; B-; B+ (left switch contacts); B- (top switch); 5V (printed three times, one beside each of the Retracted, Middle and Extended lines); B- (centre); B- (bottom left); 24V; V in a circle (five voltmeter symbols)
    Drive Motor Controller boxDrive Motor Controller; B-
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 104, used with permission. SES ref PF-QUXV-7X5N‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠​​​⁠​‌⁠⁠‍‍​​​‍‌‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 104 of 164
    Service Manual: SC750, SC800, SC 750 ST, SC800 ST

    Brush disc remove feature

    The brush disc remove feature spins the brushes and then brings them to an abrupt stop to release the brushes from the brush plate retaining springs. To accomplish this, a series of events takes place.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​‍​‌⁠‍​⁠‍​​​​‌‍⁠‍‍‌‌​

    Step #1

    First the Main Machine Controller checks to make sure that the scrub deck is fully raised, the charger is not plugged in and that the machine is not moving. If all of this is true, the controller energizes the brush motor contactor to supply battery positive through its normally open (Closed when energized) contacts to power up the brushes. The brush motor contactor has a second set of contacts which are normally closed (Open when energized).

    Wiring drawing titled Brush Remove Step #1 with key switch, brush remove relay, Main Machine Controller box, energized brush contactor and two brush motors.
    Brush remove, step #1
    Area of drawingLabels printed there
    Drawing titleBrush Remove Step #1
    Top of drawingB+; Key Switch; B-; Brush Remove Relay
    Main Machine Controller boxMain Machine Controller; B-; B-
    Right and bottom of drawingB+; Brush Contactor (energized); Brush Motors (two, each marked M); B-

    Step #2

    While the brushes are running, the Main Machine Controller energizes the brush remove relay. This provides a battery negative connection to one of the “open when energized” contacts. Since that side of the contactor is open at this time, nothing changes but the system is “armed” and ready.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 105, used with permission. SES ref PF-J66E-3FAD‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​‍​‌⁠‍​⁠‍​​​​‌‍⁠‍‍‌‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 105 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Wiring drawing titled Brush Remove Step 2. Shows B+ and B- battery terminals, the key switch, the brush remove relay, the brush contactor, the two brush motors and the Main Machine Controller box with two B- terminals.
    Brush remove, step #2

    Step #3

    Next the brush motor relay is de-energized. This removes the battery positive power source from the motor AND instead connects the motor to battery negative through the normally closed contacts. The motor stops abruptly when both sides are connected to battery negative. It is the abrupt stop that releases the brush lugs from the plate retaining spring. After a time out period the Main Machine Controller de-energizes the brush remove relay.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‍‌⁠​‌‌⁠‍​‌‌‌‌⁠​​​⁠‍​

    Wiring drawing titled Brush Remove Step 3. Same layout as step 2, with the brush remove relay labeled energized and the brush contactor labeled de-energized; the switch inside the Main Machine Controller is drawn open.
    Brush remove, step #3
    Label as printedStep #2 drawingStep #3 drawing
    Key SwitchKey SwitchKey Switch
    Brush Remove RelayBrush Remove RelayBrush Remove Relay (energized)
    Brush ContactorBrush ContactorBrush Contactor (De-energized)
    Brush MotorsBrush MotorsBrush Motors
    Main Machine ControllerMain Machine ControllerMain Machine Controller
    Terminal labelsB+ (2), B- (4)B+ (2), B- (4)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 106, used with permission. SES ref PF-QAVD-BIT5‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍‍‌⁠​‌‌⁠‍​‌‌‌‌⁠​​​⁠‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 106 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Component locations

    Photo of the machine with the brush head (deck) at the front underside outlined and labeled Brush Head (Deck).
    Brush head (deck)
    Photo of the brush head from the front showing the two brush motors on top, the brush plates under them, and blue arrows marking the rotation of each disc. Labels: Brush Motor, Brush Plate, Rotation.
    Brush motor, brush plate and rotation
    Photo inside the battery area showing the gas spring, labeled Gas Spring.
    Gas spring
    Photo of the lift area with the gas spring and the brush head actuator labeled Gas Spring and Brush Head Actuator.
    Gas spring and brush head actuator
    Photo of the electrical panel with the brush remove relay K3 and the brush contactor K2 labeled; the panel is labeled Electrical Panel.
    Electrical panel: brush remove relay K3 and brush contactor K2
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 107, used with permission. SES ref PF-ERHJ-IWVE‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍​​‍​‍‍‍‍‍‍‍​‌⁠‍⁠⁠​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 107 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Troubleshooting

    In shortIf the scrub motors will not turn on, check the brush contactor, the wiring, the Main Machine Controller and the Drive Motor Controller. If the deck will not raise or lower, test the actuator motor and then its three position switches (see page 109) with an ohmmeter; only one position switch should be open at a time.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠​⁠​​⁠

    Scrub motors do not turn on

    Possible causes‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠​⁠​​⁠

    Scrub deck will not raise or lower

    Possible causes

    • Mechanical binding for the actuator linkage
    • Brush Head Actuator – Check both the motor and the position switches. Only one position switch should be open at a time and it should open at the correct position.
      • Actuator Motor
        • Unplug the actuator connector and momentarily supply fused 24v power and ground to the two motor terminals to see if the motor will operate. (Machine harness wire color Pink wire and Gray wire). Reverse the polarity to drive it in both directions. If the motor will not drive in both directions, replace the actuator. If it does drive in both directions, proceed to check the position switches.
      • Position Switches
        • Access the Main Machine Controller and unplug the electrical connectors.
        • Check the retracted position switch.
          • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
          • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the White wire at the J2 connector pin 3.
          • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
          • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the retracted position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 108, used with permission. SES ref PF-3JPE-I2RR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‍‍​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠​⁠​​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 108 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    • Check the middle position switch.
      • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
      • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Yellow wire at the J2 connector pin 11.
      • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
      • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the middle position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    • Check the extended position switch.
      • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
      • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Green wire at the J2 connector pin 12.
      • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
      • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the extended position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 109, used with permission. SES ref PF-76PV-YZBU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠‍‍​‌‌​​​‌‍​⁠⁠​‌​‍​‍‍‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 109 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    In shortTo take off the brush head, loosen the three mounting fasteners, lower the head to the floor with the key on, then turn the key off and disconnect the scrub motor connectors and the solution hose. Remove the three fasteners and pull the head out from under the machine. Carbon brushes are on page 111 and the actuator is on page 112.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍⁠​⁠‌⁠​‌‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‍

    Scrub brush

    Brush head

    1. Remove plastic brush head covers.
    2. Remove scrub brushes.
    3. Loosen, but do not remove the 3 brush head mounting fasteners.
    Photo looking up under the machine at the brush head bracket with the three mounting fasteners circled and labeled Loosen Fasteners.
    Loosen fasteners
    1. Turn the key on and press the scrub on/off button to lower the brush head to the floor. Then turn the key off leaving the brush head on the floor.
    2. Disconnect scrub motor electrical connectors.
    3. Disconnect the solution hose.
    4. Remove the 3 brush head mounting fasteners.
    Photo of the solution hose and its clamp at the brush head, with an arrow and the label Remove Solution Hose.
    Remove solution hose
    1. Pull brush head out from under the machine.
    2. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 110, used with permission. SES ref PF-LX5X-Q56Z‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍⁠​‍‍⁠​⁠‌⁠​‌‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 110 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Scrub motor carbon brushes

    Note: Photos in this section were taken with the motor removed from the machine for better clarity.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‌​‍‌‌‍‍‍​​‌​​‍‌

    1. Remove the plastic motor cover.
    2. Remove wiring from motor connectors.
    3. Remove one of the round plastic brush caps using a large slotted screw driver.
    Photo of a motor end with a large slotted screwdriver in the round plastic brush cap and a red arrow showing the turning direction.
    Turning the brush cap with a screwdriver
    Photo of a hand lifting the round plastic brush cap off the motor, exposing the brush holder.
    Brush cap removed
    1. Pull the brush and spring assembly out.
    Photo of a hand pulling the brush and spring assembly out of the brush holder.
    Pulling out the brush and spring
    Photo of the removed carbon brush with its spring beside the empty brush holder.
    Brush and spring removed
    1. Reassemble in reverse order lining up the two locking tabs of the brush cap when installing the brush cap. Repeat for second carbon brush.
    Photo of the brush cap being lined up with the brush holder, with red circles and lines marking the two locking tabs.
    Lining up the two locking tabs
    Photo of a slotted screwdriver turning the brush cap, with a red arrow showing the turning direction.
    Tightening the brush cap
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 111, used with permission. SES ref PF-7MKO-TFOC‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‌​‍‌‌‍‍‍​​‌​​‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 111 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Brush head actuator

    1. Empty recovery tank.
    2. Press the scrub button to lower the brush head.
    3. a. If the actuator does not move, slightly raise the brush head with a jack to take tension off of the mounting hardware.
    4. Lift recovery tank up.
    5. Disconnect electrical connector so the actuator will not move and then turn the key off.
    Photo of a hand holding the disconnected actuator electrical connector next to the actuator.
    Actuator electrical connector disconnected
    1. Remove upper and lower fasteners.
    Photo of the upper end of the actuator with the upper fastener circled and labeled Upper Fastener.
    Upper fastener
    Photo of the lower end of the actuator with the lower fastener circled and labeled Lower Fastener.
    Lower fastener
    1. Remove actuator.
    2. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Parts for this job
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 112, used with permission. SES ref PF-JFRH-VJLW‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‍‍‌​⁠‍​⁠​‌‍​⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 112 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Specifications

    In shortNo-load scrub motor draw is about 4 amps, and total scrub draw runs 15-30 amps in regular scrub mode and 30-45 amps in extreme scrub mode (low solution flow). Scrub force is 80 lb (36.3 kg) in regular scrub and 170 lb (77.1 kg) in extreme scrub.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌​‍‍​‌

    Scrub motor amp draw

    No Load - Approximately 4 Amps‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌​‍‍​‌

    Scrub motor total amp draw

    Total amp draw in regular scrub mode with low solution flow for all size decks ranges from 15-30 Amps depending on the floor surface. Total amp draw in extreme scrub mode with low solution flow for all size decks ranges from 30-45 Amps depending on the floor surface.

    Scrub motor speed

    260-270 RPM

    Scrub force

    Regular Scrub = 80 lb (36.3 kg)

    Extreme Scrub = 170 lb (77.1 kg)

    Brush head actuator amp draw

    Upward with weight of deck – Approximately 2-3 Amps

    Brush contactor

    Winding Resistance – 55 ohms

    Gas spring

    Force – 112 lb (500 N)

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 113, used with permission. SES ref PF-PYOP-AXUB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌​‍‍​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 113 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Scrub system, Rev

    Functional description

    Scrubbing

    In shortThe Main Machine Controller turns the scrub motors on through the brush contactor and moves the scrub head with an electric actuator that has three position switches: retracted, middle (normal scrub pressure) and extended (extreme scrub pressure). If more than one position switch is open at a time, the controller will not move the actuator (see page 115).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌​‌‍⁠⁠‌‍‍‌⁠‍

    The scrub system moves the scrub head up and down and turns the scrub motors on and off at the operator’s request to provide floor scrubbing action. The discs spin toward the center at the front edge of each disc. The head is moved up and down by an electric actuator motor that has integrated position switches. The weight of the scrub head provides the downward pressure in the normal scrub mode. When extreme pressure is requested, the actuator moves down farther causing a gas spring to exert additional downward pressure on the floor.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌​‌‍⁠⁠‌‍‍‌⁠‍

    The Main Machine Controller energizes the brush solenoid to turn on the brush motors when the following inputs have been met:

    • Key switch on
    • Operator request
    • Machine moving signal (FOR/REV) is received from the Drive Motor Controller (A2 PG Drives Speed Controller)
      • Approximately 24 volts received from the main controller (J3 Pin 6) is switched to battery negative by the Drive Motor Controller, dropping the voltage to 0 volts.

    Here is how the circuit works for the scrub motors. The Main Machine Controller turns on the scrub motors indirectly by energizing the brush contactor. The brush contactor coil is fed battery positive voltage through the key switch. The voltage goes through the coil and on to the controller. Inside the controller, it switches the circuit to battery negative to energize the relay. When the relay energizes, positive battery voltage is applied through its contacts to the brush motors. Since the other side of the motors is connected to battery negative, they turn on.

    The Main Machine Controller also monitors the amount of electrical current (Amps) that is flowing through the brush motor ground circuit. If it is higher or lower than expected, a fault code will be set. It monitors the amperage indirectly on a “sense” wire by measuring the difference in voltage (Voltage Drop) between a point near the motors and the main battery negative terminal. As actual current increases, the voltage drop measured increases. The controller then converts the voltage value to “Amps”. The monitoring circuit relies on a calibrated ground wire that is a specific gauge and length.

    An electric actuator is used to move the scrub head up and down. The actuator has a DC permanent magnet electric motor which is driven by the Main Machine Controller. The motor turns a threaded shaft. When the threaded shaft turns, it moves a threaded rod up and down. Since the rod is attached to the deck, it moves the deck up and down.

    Inside the actuator housing there are also three position switches which are monitored by the Main Machine Controller. One is for the “retracted” position, one for the “middle” position (Normal scrub pressure) and one for the “Extended” position (Extreme scrub pressure). Each switch is normally closed. The threaded rod has a collar on it that opens each switch as it passes by it. When the Main Machine Controller sees the middle position switch open, it knows that the deck is in the normal scrub position. If that was its goal position, the controller turns off the motor to stop the deck in that position.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 114, used with permission. SES ref PF-WUBN-GDTS‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠‌​‌‍⁠⁠‌‍‍‌⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 114 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Here is how the circuit works for the actuator. The Main Machine Controller directly drives the brush head actuator motor. It applies system voltage across the two actuator motor wires to move the motor up. It reverses polarity to move the motor down. Each position switch receives a 5 volt feed through a resistor from the controller, which returns back to battery negative on a common wire to connector J2 pin 2. The controller has “internal voltmeters” which monitor the signal voltage of each switch circuit. When the switch is closed, the voltage signal is approximately 0 volts. When the switch is open, the voltage is approximately 5 volts.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‍​⁠​⁠‍​‍‌‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​‌‍‌

    1. Deck up - Retracted Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    2. Normal Scrub mode - Middle Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)
    3. Extreme Scrub mode – Extended Position switch = 5v (Other two switches = 0v)

    Note: The actuator “extended” position switch circuit is unique because it is also used as a communication line between the Main Machine Controller and the battery charger. The addition of the battery charger on the circuit drops the 5v that is normally seen when the switch is open to approximately 3 volts. This is normal.

    When the key is turned off, if the brush head is down, the Main Machine Controller will raise the brush head to the full up position. When the operator requests the scrub mode, the controller drives the actuator down until it sees the Middle Position switch open (5v). When the operator turns off the scrub function, the controller drives the actuator motor up until it sees the Retracted Position switch open again (5v). If more than one position switch is open (5v) at a time, the controller does not know which one to believe. It realizes there must be a problem and will not move the actuator.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 115, used with permission. SES ref PF-OQYM-DGX4‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‍​⁠​⁠‍​‍‌‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​‌‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 115 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Functional circuit diagram, scrub system - REV

    Functional circuit diagram of the REV scrub system. Top: battery B+, key switch, brush contactor, two brush motors, B- and a sense wire. Left box: brush head actuator shown in retracted position with Retracted, Middle and Extended position switches. Center box: Main Machine Controller with B+, B-, three 5V switch feeds with voltmeters, a sense-wire voltmeter and a 24V feed. Bottom: Drive Motor Controller box with a B- switch.
    Functional circuit diagram, scrub system - REV
    Area of the drawingLabels as printed
    Outside the boxes (top)B+, Key Switch, Brush Contactor, Wht, Brush Motors, B-, Sense Wire
    Brush Head Actuator boxM, Retracted, Middle, Extended; Wht (on the Retracted line, between the two boxes); caption: Brush Head Actuator - Shown in retracted position
    Main Machine Controller boxB+, B-, B+, 5V (three), B- (four), 24V; caption: Main Machine Controller
    Drive Motor Controller boxB-; caption: Drive Motor Controller
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 116, used with permission. SES ref PF-5AID-HSSM‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍⁠‌​​‍⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍‍​‍‍​​​​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 116 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Component locations

    Photo of the REV brush head at the front of the machine with the deck labeled Brush Head (Deck) and blue arrows labeled Rotation.
    Brush head (deck) and rotation
    Photo of the REV brush head with arrows to the two brush motors, labeled Brush Motor.
    Brush motor
    Photo of the battery area with an arrow to the brush head actuator, labeled Brush Head Actuator.
    Brush head actuator
    Photo of the lift area with an arrow to the gas spring, labeled Gas Spring.
    Gas spring
    Photo of the electrical panel with an arrow to the brush contactor, labeled Brush Contactor K2; the panel is labeled Electrical Panel.
    Electrical panel and brush contactor K2
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 117, used with permission. SES ref PF-AWB4-CB2H‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍‌‌‍‌⁠‌​​⁠​‍⁠‍⁠​​⁠‍‌⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 117 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Troubleshooting

    In shortIf the scrub motors will not turn on, check the brush contactor, the wiring, the Main Machine Controller and the Drive Motor Controller. If the deck will not raise or lower, test the actuator motor and then its three position switches (see page 119) with an ohmmeter; only one position switch should be open at a time.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‍‌⁠‍​⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠​‍​

    Scrub motors do not turn on

    Possible causes‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‍‌⁠‍​⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠​‍​

    Scrub deck will not raise or lower

    Possible causes

    • Mechanical binding for the actuator linkage
    • Brush Head Actuator – Check both the motor and the position switches. Only one position switch should be open at a time and it should open at the correct position.
      • Actuator Motor
        • Unplug the actuator connector and momentarily supply fused 24v power and ground to the two motor terminals to see if the motor will operate. (Machine harness wire color Pink wire and Gray wire). Reverse the polarity to drive it in both directions. If the motor will not drive in both directions, replace the actuator. If it does drive in both directions, proceed to check the position switches.
      • Position Switches
        • Access the Main Machine Controller and unplug the electrical connectors.
        • Check the retracted position switch.
          • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
          • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the White wire at the J2 connector pin 3.
          • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
          • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the retracted position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 118, used with permission. SES ref PF-5QRK-BUBW‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‍‍‌⁠‍​⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 118 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    • Check the middle position switch.
      • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
      • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Yellow wire at the J2 connector pin 11.
      • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
      • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the middle position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    • Check the extended position switch.
      • Put the black ohmmeter lead on the Brown wire at the J2 connector pin 2.
      • Put the red ohmmeter lead on the Green wire at the J2 connector pin 12.
      • Drive the actuator motor all the way up and down using jumper wires powered by battery positive and negative. Connect them to the two actuator motor wires at the Main Machine Controller connector. (Pink wire at connector J1 pin 4 and Gray wire at connector J1 pin 5.) Change polarity to change direction. Immediately remove jumper wires at the end of motor travel.
      • Monitor the ohmmeter. It should show an open circuit (no continuity) only when the actuator is in the extended position. In all other positions it should show a closed circuit (continuity).
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 119, used with permission. SES ref PF-TSSQ-WUJF‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍​‍‍‍‌⁠‌​‍​⁠‌‍‌‌‍​⁠⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 119 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    In shortTo remove the REV brush head, lower it to the floor with the key on, then turn the key off and disconnect the main battery pack connector. Disconnect both brush motors, the solution hose and the ground wire, remove the through bolt to the lift mechanism bracket, and slide the head forward out of the machine.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‍‌‌‍‍‌‌⁠⁠‍​‍‌‍⁠‍⁠‍​‌‌

    Brush head

    1. Turn key on and push scrub on/off switch to lower the brush head to the floor. Then turn the key off and disconnect the main battery pack connector.
    2. Disconnect the wiring for both brush motors. Note: the wiring connectors near one motor are not both for the same motor. They are one positive for each motor or one negative for each motor, depending on which side you are working.
    3. Loosen the solution hose clamp and remove the hose from the brush head. Remove the nut and bolt attaching the ground wire to the brush head.
    Photo of the brush head with an arrow to the solution hose clamp labeled Remove Hose Clamp and Hose, and an arrow to the ground wire fastener labeled Remove Ground Wire Fastener.
    Hose clamp and ground wire fastener
    1. Remove the through bolt that attaches the brush head to the lift mechanism bracket. Pay attention to the orientation of the washers and bushings.
    Photo of the REV brush head showing the lift mechanism bracket and through bolt in place.
    Through bolt in place
    Photo of the brush head with the through bolt, washers and bushings removed and laid out beside it.
    Through bolt, washers and bushings removed
    1. Carefully cut the tie straps around the brush motor wire loops. (Do not damage the wires)
    2. Raise the lift bracket mechanism with your hand and slide the brush head assembly forward until it clears the machine.
    3. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 120, used with permission. SES ref PF-G2MZ-O5YC‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‍‌‌‍‍‌‌⁠⁠‍​‍‌‍⁠‍⁠‍​‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 120 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Brush motor

    1. Remove the Brush Head from the machine. (See Removal and Installation, Brush Head.)
    2. Flip the deck disc side up and remove the pads.
    3. Remove the pad holder by removing the 6 attaching screws.
    Photo of the underside of the deck with the pad holder center plate and red arrows pointing to the six attaching screws.
    Pad holder attaching screws
    1. Remove the counter weight by removing the two attaching bolts.
    Photo of a wrench on the two bolts of the counter weight, with an arrow and the label Counter Weight.
    Counter weight
    1. Lift the driver motor with the eccentric from the brush motor shaft being careful not to lose the square-cut key.
    Photo of the driver motor lifted off to the left with arrows labeled Driver Motor and Eccentric, and the brush motor shaft exposed on the right.
    Driver motor and eccentric
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 121, used with permission. SES ref PF-RZUX-6O5V‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​‌‌‌‍‍‍​​‍‌‍‌⁠⁠‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 121 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Note the orientation of the brush motor electrical leads relative to the deck to make sure you install the motor in the same position. You may want to mark the orientation of the brush motor to the motor plate. Then separate the brush motor from the motor plate by removing the 4 attaching screws and remove the motor.
    Photo of a marker drawing an alignment mark across the brush motor and the motor plate, with arrows labeled Motor and Plate.
    Marking motor and plate orientation
    Photo of a drill with a screwdriver bit removing one of the four screws holding the brush motor to the motor plate.
    Removing the four motor screws
    1. Reassemble in reverse order noting the following:
    2. Use a small amount of Loctite Threadlocker blue 243 or equivalent on all fasteners.
    3. Apply Loctite Anti-seize (90101A) to the bore of the eccentric before installing eccentric on brush motor shaft.

    Drive motor, bearing and eccentric

    Removal‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‍​​⁠‍‌‌‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍‌

    1. Remove the brush head and brush motor according to the previous sections.
    2. Press the eccentric out of the bearing inner race using an arbor press.
    3. Remove the bearing retainer by removing the three fasteners.
    4. Press the bearing out of the driver motor using an arbor press.
    Exploded drawing of the drive motor assembly from top to bottom: Eccentric, Bearing Retainer, Bearing, Driver Motor and Gasket, each labeled.
    Drive motor, bearing and eccentric, exploded view

    Installation

    1. Apply Loctite 609 retaining compound to the bearing bore in the driver motor and to the surface of the inner bearing race.
    Photo of the empty bearing bore in the driver motor.
    Bearing bore in the driver motor
    Photo of a hand holding the bearing while retaining compound is applied to its inner race.
    Retaining compound on the bearing
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 122, used with permission. SES ref PF-2W3Z-CPDZ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​​⁠‍⁠‍​​⁠‍‌‌‌‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‍‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 122 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Press the bearing into the driver motor.
    2. Install the bearing retainer.
    3. Press the eccentric into the bearing.
    4. Install a new gasket on the driver motor with the adhesive side toward the driver motor.
    5. Apply Loctite Anti-seize (90101A) to the bore of the eccentric.
    Photo of a brush applying anti-seize to the bore of the eccentric in the driver motor.
    Anti-seize on the eccentric bore
    Parts for this job

    Motor plate and isolators

    Removal‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‌​​‍‌​

    1. Remove the brush head from the machine.
    2. Remove the brush motor.
    3. Remove the retaining bolts, large washers and sleeves.
    Photo inside the deck with a wrench on a retaining bolt and arrows labeled Remove pointing to the retaining bolts.
    Retaining bolts
    1. Remove the motor plate by removing the 4 isolator nuts.
    Photo of the motor plate with arrows labeled Remove 4 isolator nuts and an arrow labeled Inspect Splash Shield.
    Isolator nuts and splash shield
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 123, used with permission. SES ref PF-GDY3-GOKQ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍​‍‍​‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‌​​‍‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 123 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Inspect the splash shield and replace if damaged.
    2. Flip the scrub head upright and remove each of the isolators from the brush head by removing the plastic cover and the attaching nut.
    Photo inside the upright scrub head with arrows labeled Isolators pointing to the four isolators.
    Isolators
    Photo of the top of the scrub head with a tool lifting a plastic cover over an isolator nut.
    Removing a plastic cover
    Photo of the top of the scrub head showing the isolator covers and the REV label.
    Top of the scrub head

    Installation‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‍​‍‌‍‍‍​‌​⁠‌​⁠‍‌​‍⁠⁠‍

    1. Apply Loctite blue 243 threadlocker or equivalent to the threads of each isolator.
    Photo of a hand holding an isolator whose threads are coated with blue threadlocker.
    Threadlocker on isolator threads
    1. Install the isolators in the brush head. Position each one so that the color stripe it will be visible when the motor plate is installed. Torque each nut to 8-10 ft-lb (10.8-13.5 N·m). Install the 4 plastic covers over the nuts.
    Photo of an installed isolator with an arrow and the label Color Stripe.
    Isolator color stripe
    1. Apply Loctite blue 243 threadlocker or equivalent to the threads of each isolator. Install the motor plate and 4 isolator nuts. Torque each nut to 8-10 ft-lb (10.8-13.5 N·m). Ensure that the isolator rubber does not twist when you tighten the nuts. Visually inspect the color stripe to make sure that it is straight line and not twisted. If it is twisted, loosen the nut and repeat the procedure. It may be necessary to hold the isolator in position with your hand while tighten the nut.
    Parts for this job
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 124, used with permission. SES ref PF-TAYB-OMAY‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‍​‍‌‍‍‍​‌​⁠‌​⁠‍‌​‍⁠⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 124 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Scrub motor carbon brushes

    1. Remove the brush head from the machine.
    2. Remove wire retaining nut and rubber packing.
    Photo of a hand holding the wire retaining nut and rubber packing removed from the motor cable entry.
    Wire retaining nut and rubber packing removed
    1. Mark orientation of end plates to motor housing and remove both through bolts.
    Photo of a marker drawing an orientation mark across the end plate and motor housing.
    Marking end plate orientation
    Photo of a hand holding the two long through bolts above the motor after removing them.
    Through bolts removed
    1. Remove end plate.
    Photo of the motor with the end plate lifted off and turned beside the housing, showing the brush holders on the end plate and the armature inside.
    End plate removed
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 125, used with permission. SES ref PF-YDY2-KFOB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‍⁠‌‍​‌​​‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌‍​⁠‍​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 125 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Replace the carbon brushes.
    2. a. Observe how the springs roll when the brush is pushed back before taking it apart.
    3. b. Remove a brush and spring.
    4. c. Install a new brush and spring into the brush holder. Thread the brush wire lead through the brush holder. Position the back end of the brush in the “cup” of the spring so that the spring will unroll as the brush is pushed back once it is installed.
    Photo of a brush spring held in fingers with an arrow and the label Cup Side.
    Cup side of the spring
    Photo of a carbon brush being seated in the cup of the spring.
    Brush seated in the spring cup
    1. d. Push brush back against the spring and insert a stiff temporary retaining wire (Paper clip) through the access hole in the end cover. (Remove silicone sealer from the holes) The wire must go through the holes in the brush holder just in front of the brush to hold the brush back against the spring pressure.
    Photo of a paper clip inserted through the access hole in the end cover, labeled Paper Clip.
    Paper clip through the end cover
    Photo of the brush holders with paper clips through the holes in front of the brushes, two arrows labeled Paper Clip.
    Paper clips holding the brushes back
    1. e. Install the other three brushes.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 126, used with permission. SES ref PF-NSBB-U54W‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​⁠⁠​⁠⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠‌‌‍​‍‌⁠​​⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 126 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Install the spring washer so that the “fingers” will press against the outside bearing race.
    Hand holding the spring washer over the motor armature, with arrows from the label “Fingers against Outer Race” to the washer fingers
    Spring washer fingers against the outer race
    1. Install the end cover in stages.
      1. Install it far enough so that the brushes will contact the commutator when the temporary retaining wires are removed. Then remove the wires.
        Inside the motor housing, with arrows from the labels “Carbon Brush” and “Commutator” to the carbon brush and the commutator
        Carbon brush and commutator
      2. Fully seat the end cover.
      3. Install the through bolts.
      4. Seal the retaining wire holes in the end cover with silicone sealant.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 127, used with permission. SES ref PF-BUTZ-5ZEV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠‌‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠⁠‌​​⁠‌⁠‍‍⁠‍‌⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 127 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Brush head actuator

    In shortLower the brush head, unplug the actuator, then take out the upper and lower fasteners. When you put it back, snug the upper nut and bolt and back it off about 1/2 turn so the joint can move freely.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍​‌‍​‌⁠‍⁠‌‍​‌‌⁠‌⁠​​⁠​‍
    1. Empty recovery tank.
    2. Press the scrub button to lower the brush head.
      1. If the actuator does not move, slightly raise the brush head with a jack to take tension off of the mounting hardware.
    3. Tip the recovery tank up.
    4. Disconnect electrical connector so the actuator will not move and then turn the key off.
    5. Remove upper and lower fasteners.
    Two photos of the brush head actuator, the left with an arrow from the label “Upper Fastener” and the right with an arrow from the label “Lower Fastener”
    Upper and lower actuator fasteners
    1. Remove actuator.
    2. Reassemble in reverse order.
    3. Tighten the upper actuator nut and bolt until it is snug and then back off approximately 1/2 turn. This joint must be allowed to move freely.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 128, used with permission. SES ref PF-67RE-PGRF‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​​​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍‍​‌‍​‌⁠‍⁠‌‍​‌‌⁠‌⁠​​⁠​‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 128 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Specifications

    Scrub motor amp draw

    No Load - Approximately 16-19 Amps (one motor).‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‌‌​‍​‌‍​‌‍‌‍​​‌​​‌⁠‌​

    Note: Only run the test for a few seconds. Remove the pads before testing no load amp draw as the motor will spin the pad driver around 2,000 RPM and may throw the pad.

    Scrub motor total amp draw

    Total amp draw will vary widely based on floor surface, solution flow and pad type. You may see anywhere from 12 - 32 Amps (both motors) when stripping or scrubbing.

    Epoxy floor and red pads, normal scrub mode. Measured 25-26 Amps.

    Epoxy floor and red pads, extreme scrub mode. Measured 28-10 Amps.

    Scrub motor speed

    Approximately 2,000 RPM

    Scrub force

    Regular Scrub = 70.4 lbs. (31.9 kg)

    Extreme Scrub = 170 lbs. (77.1 kg)

    Brush head actuator amp draw

    Upward with weight of deck – Approximately 2 Amps

    Brush contactor

    Winding Resistance – 55 ohms

    Gas spring

    Force – 112 pounds (500 N)

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 129, used with permission. SES ref PF-AVJE-GI7N‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌‌‌​‍​‌‍​‌‍‌‍​​‌​​‌⁠‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 129 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Solution system

    Functional description

    In shortThe controller opens the solution solenoid valve only while the machine is moving, and meters flow by cycling it: on about 1/3 of the time for low flow, about 2/3 for medium, and constantly for high. The valve is spring loaded closed, so it must be energized to open. Page 131 shows the circuit.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍‌‌‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠

    The solution system dispenses water and detergent to the scrub brush head for scrubbing the floor. The solution tank holds the solution and serves as the main body of the scrubber. Solution from the tank flows through a manual shut off valve, filter, solution valve (solenoid), manifold and out to the deck. Disc decks deliver the solution on top of the disc near the center. On Cylindrical decks the solution is delivered through several small holes in manifold hoses along the front of the deck. The solution then drips through holes in the deck in front of the forward brush. The filter protects the solution valve from debris which can damage the valve. The manual shut off valve makes it possible to service plumbing components without draining the solution tank.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍‌‌‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠

    The standard solution system requires the operator to mix a cleaning detergent with the water in the solution tank. An electric solenoid valve is used to turn the solution flow on and off as well as to meter the amount of solution used. The solution valve is controlled by the Main Machine Controller.

    SC750 and SC800 models report solution tank liquid level information to the operator on the Control Panel LCD. The system does not measure the level of the water directly. It measures the pressure the water exerts on a pressure sensor through a sealed hose. The higher the liquid level, the more pressure is exerted on the sensor. There is a pressure sensor mounted on the main machine control board with a clear hose that connects to a fitting on the solution tank. On the other side of the fitting another hose goes into the tank. When the tank is filled with water/detergent, the liquid tries to fill the hose but since the hose is sealed off it cannot displace the air in the hose and consequently cannot fill the hose with liquid. It does exert pressure on the sensor which is converted to a voltage and “read” by the controller. This is like holding your thumb over the top end of a drinking straw and inserting the straw into your soft drink. The liquid does not enter the straw because the air cannot escape out of the straw. What you don’t notice with your thumb is that the air inside the straw is actually slightly pressurized by the liquid trying to displace the air.

    On all machines, the Main Machine Controller turns the solution flow on and off and meters the amount that flows via an electric solenoid valve based on operator request and whether or not the machine is moving. The solution solenoid valve is spring loaded closed and must be energized to pull the valve open and allow solution to flow. To control the amount of solution, the controller cycles the solenoid on and off at a slow rate. For low flow, the valve is on for about 1/3 of the time and off for 2/3 of the time. For medium flow, it is on about 2/3 of the time. For high flow it is on constantly. The solution is intentionally shut off whenever the machine stops moving.

    The optional detergent mixing system automatically mixes water from the solution tank with detergent from a separate detergent container. The operator fills the solution tank with water only. The machine then automatically mixes the correct amount of detergent and water and delivers it to the scrub brush head. A piston type detergent pump is used to “inject” the detergent into the solution hose. The controller keeps track of how many times it has stroked the piston pump and can calculate the level of liquid remaining in the detergent tank based on how many strokes it has counted. In order for this to work though, the operator must “tell” the controller when a full detergent tank is installed so that the controller can reset its counter and start again at the beginning. The detergent is injected into the solution hose “before” the solution solenoid valve. The water and detergent mixture is then regulated by the solenoid valve.

    Here is how the solution electrical circuit works. In order to understand whether the machine is moving or not, the Main Machine Controller sends 24v out through a resistor on a WHT/RED wire to the drive motor controller. The drive motor controller has an internal switch that switches the circuit to battery negative whenever the machine is moving. The Main Machine Controller has an internal voltmeter that monitors the circuit. When it sees 24 volts, it knows the machine is standing still. When it sees the voltage drop to near zero it knows the machine is moving and it then turns on the solution flow. To make the solution flow, the key switch provides battery positive (B+) voltage to the solution solenoid valve. The voltage goes through the solenoid winding and on to the Main Machine Controller. The controller completes the circuit to battery negative (B-) through an internal switch causing the solenoid to energize and open the valve. If the

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 130, used with permission. SES ref PF-DQAF-2C27‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‌​​‍‌‌‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌‍⁠‌⁠‌‌​​‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 130 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    machine has the optional detergent mixing system, the Main Machine Controller also operates the additional detergent pump. The two wires for the pump are wired directly to the Main Machine Controller. The Main Machine Controller supplies battery positive on one wire and battery negative on the other for a short period of time to stroke the piston in one direction. It then immediately reverses polarity and does it again to stroke the piston back in the other direction.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠⁠‌‍​​‍‍‌⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌⁠‍‍​

    Circuit drawing titled Solution System showing a key switch, the solution solenoid, the Main Machine Controller with a 24V resistor and voltmeter, and the Drive Motor Controller
    Solution system circuit
    Label printed on drawingKind
    Solution SystemDrawing title
    Key SwitchComponent label
    B+Terminal label
    Solution SolenoidComponent label
    Main Machine ControllerBox label
    24VVoltage label
    B-Terminal label (shown twice inside the Main Machine Controller box)
    Drive Motor ControllerBox label
    B-Terminal label (inside the Drive Motor Controller box)
    Circuit drawing titled Detergent Pump Circuit showing the detergent pump motor connected by two wires to the Main Machine Controller, which lists B+, B- and B+ terminals
    Detergent pump circuit
    Label printed on drawingKind
    Detergent Pump CircuitDrawing title
    Detergent PumpComponent label
    Main Machine ControllerBox label
    B+Terminal label (top terminal)
    B-Terminal label (middle terminal)
    B+Terminal label (bottom terminal)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 131, used with permission. SES ref PF-LZSM-7FDU‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍​⁠⁠‌‍​​‍‍‌⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌⁠‍‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 131 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Component locations

    Photo of the machine from the side with labels Solution filter, Shut off valve (Ball Valve), Solution Tank and Solution Drain Hose, plus an inset close-up of the filter and valve
    Solution filter, shut off valve, solution tank and drain hose
    Photo of the open battery compartment with labels Detergent Tank and Detergent Pump, plus an inset close-up of the pump
    Detergent tank and detergent pump
    Photo of the machine from the rear corner with the label Solution Solenoid Valve and an inset close-up of the valve
    Solution solenoid valve
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 132, used with permission. SES ref PF-7W4E-NM2W‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌⁠‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‌‌‍​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 132 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Maintenance and adjustments

    Solution filter cleaning

    1. Work near a floor drain for convenient clean up if possible.
    2. Turn the key switch off.
    3. Close the shut off valve (The valve is closed when the lever is NOT in line with the hose).
    4. Unscrew the solution filter cover.
    5. Remove and clean the screen.
    6. Reassemble in reverse order. Note: Over-tightening the cover will cause it to crack.
    7. Open the shut off valve.
    Photo under the machine showing a hand at the blue lever of the shut off valve beside the solution filter
    Closing the shut off valve
    Photo of a hand holding the solution filter bowl and cover below the hoses
    Unscrewing the solution filter cover
    Photo of a hand holding the filter screen above the filter cover, with an arrow from the label Screen
    Filter screen removed
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 133, used with permission. SES ref PF-66X7-Z3DT‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌⁠⁠‍​‌⁠​​‍‍‍‍‍​⁠⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 133 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Troubleshooting

    Insufficient solution flow

    Possible Causes‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌‌⁠⁠‌

    Solution leaks after machine is shut off

    Possible Causes

    • Solution valve not sealing (Worn or debris holding it open.)
    • Hose or fitting leak before solution valve

    Detergent is not being added to the solution (Machines with optional detergent mixing system)

    Possible Causes

    • Detergent tank empty
    • Detergent hose blocked or leaking
    • Detergent pump
    • Wiring
    • Main machine controller
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 134, used with permission. SES ref PF-C23A-NJJM‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‌‌⁠⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 134 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    Solution valve

    1. Work near a floor drain for convenient clean up if possible.
    2. Turn the key switch on and lower the brush head by pushing the Scrub On/Off switch.
    3. Unplug the deck actuator to prevent deck from rising.
    4. Turn the key switch off.
    5. Close solution shut off valve.
    6. Remove solution mounting plate screws.
    Photo under the machine with an arrow from the label Remove 2 Screws to the solution mounting plate screw
    Solution mounting plate screws (remove 2 screws)
    1. Remove hose clamps and hoses.
    2. Disconnect electrical connector.
    3. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Parts for this job

    Solution tank

    1. Empty recovery and solution tanks.
    2. Remove brush head.
    3. Remove brush head actuator.
    4. Remove recovery tank.
    5. Remove batteries.
    6. Remove brush head actuator support
      1. Remove two top bolts.
      2. Remove lower through bolt and nut.
    7. Remove handle assembly.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 135, used with permission. SES ref PF-JXGL-6GCD‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​‌‌‌​​‍‍⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 135 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Remove control panel cover.
    2. Disconnect wiring from electrical components on electrical panel.
    3. Disconnect the pressure sensor hose at the solution tank end.
    4. Thread wiring out of solution tank.
    5. Remove squeegee lift cable.
    6. Remove solution tank shut off valve elbow from tank.
    7. Remove 4 solution tank mounting bolts.
    Photo of the lower rear of the tank with arrows from the label Tank Mounting Bolts to two mounting bolts
    Tank mounting bolts, left view
    Photo of the underside of the tank with arrows from the label Tank Mounting Bolts to a bolt on each side
    Tank mounting bolts, underside view
    1. Separate tank from frame.

    Specifications

    • Solution valve winding resistance – 54 ohms
    • Solution flow – Maximum = 0.75 gallons/minute
    • Detergent pump winding resistance –37 ohms
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 136, used with permission. SES ref PF-7I6H-D5V7‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠‌‌​‌‌‍‌‌⁠​‍‌‌‍‌⁠‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 136 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Squeegee system

    Functional description

    In shortThe squeegee tool is held to the support by two hand-tightened wing nuts in slotted holes, so it can break away if it catches on something. Each blade has 4 working edges before it needs replacing.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‍‌​‌‍‌⁠‍‌​⁠‌⁠‍‍‌‌⁠‍‌

    The squeegee collects the water so that the recovery system vacuum can suck it up off the floor and store it in the recovery tank. The squeegee support is spring loaded downward to push the squeegee against the floor, and has a pivot point that allows the squeegee to “swing” around corners. The squeegee tool rides along the floor on two small wheels and is raised and lowered with a hand operated lever. To prevent damage to the squeegee tool in the event that the tool is caught by an obstacle, it is mounted to the support frame in slotted holes and is fastened by two hand tightened “wing nuts”. The squeegee angle can be adjusted for optimum floor wiping. The squeegee tool has a front and a rear blade. Each blade has 4 working edges that can be used before the blade is replaced. The front squeegee blade has slots along the bottom edge to allow the necessary air flow to carry the water. The rear squeegee blade edge is flat.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‍‌​‌‍‌⁠‍‌​⁠‌⁠‍‍‌‌⁠‍‌

    Component locations

    • Break Away Slots
    • Tilt Adjustment Knob
    Photo of the squeegee from above with labels Squeegee Support and Break Away Slots, arrows pointing to the support and to the two slotted mounting holes
    Squeegee support and break away slots
    Photo of the squeegee from the side with labels Squeegee Tool, Squeegee Lift Lever and Tilt Adjustment Knob
    Squeegee tool, lift lever and tilt adjustment knob
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 137, used with permission. SES ref PF-WYNI-JX4M‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠​‍‌​‌‍‌⁠‍‌​⁠‌⁠‍‍‌‌⁠‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 137 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Maintenance and adjustments

    Adjusting squeegee tilt

    The tilt of the squeegee causes the rear blade to rise up in the center or on the ends, depending on which direction the tilt is changed.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‍​‌‍⁠​​‌​⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍​

    1. Park the machine on a flat, even surface and lower the squeegee.
    2. While moving the machine forward slowly, turn the Squeegee Tilt Adjustment Knob until the rear squeegee blade flares evenly across the entire width of the squeegee.
    Photo of a hand turning the squeegee tilt adjustment knob on the squeegee tool
    Turning the squeegee tilt adjustment knob

    Troubleshooting

    Leaving streaks on the floor

    Possible Causes

    • Debris between squeegee blade and floor
    • Squeegee blade edges are torn or worn
    • Incorrect squeegee tilt
    • Broken squeegee springs
    • Bent squeegee support
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 138, used with permission. SES ref PF-5VXT-4CF6‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‍‍​‌‍⁠​​‌​⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 138 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    Squeegee tool

    1. Remove vacuum hose from tool.
    2. Loosen both wing nuts.
    3. Remove squeegee tool.
    4. Reassemble in reverse order. Note: Over-tightening the wing nuts can lead to damaging the squeegee tool by defeating the breakaway feature.

    Squeegee support

    1. Remove squeegee tool.
    2. Remove squeegee lift cable from support.
    3. Service Tip: The force of the springs against the pivot bolt causes it to tip backwards and makes it difficult to get the assembly removed and back into place. Neutralize the spring force by lifting the support up a bit against the spring tension and tie it up with a wire. See photo.
    Squeegee support assembly lying on the floor with a wire tying up the spring tension
    Squeegee support with spring tied up by a wire
    1. Remove the lower pivot mounting nut.
    2. Remove squeegee support assembly.
    3. Reassemble in reverse order.
      1. Cut wire used to hold spring tension.
    Parts for this job
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 139, used with permission. SES ref PF-ATSE-CMGJ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌‍⁠⁠‌‌‌⁠⁠​‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠​⁠​‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 139 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Squeegee blades

    Squeegee blades have 4 working edges. As an edge becomes worn, the blade should be removed and rotated so that a new edge is against the floor facing forward.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​‍‌‍‌⁠‍​⁠​‍‌‍‍⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠

    Front squeegee blade

    1. Remove squeegee tool.
    2. Loosen the tension strap screw
    3. Remove the tension strap.
    4. Remove the blade.
    5. Install blade on tool being careful to match the alignment slots.
    6. Install the tension strap.
    7. Tighten the tension strap screw.
    Photo of a hand holding the end of the squeegee tool with a circle and arrow from the label Tension Strap Screw
    Tension strap screw on the front blade

    Rear squeegee blade

    1. Remove squeegee tool.
    2. Unsnap the center latch.
    3. Remove the tension straps.
    4. Remove the blade.
    5. Install blade on tool, being careful to match the alignment slots.
    6. Install the tension straps.
    7. Snap the center latch closed.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 140, used with permission. SES ref PF-FDK6-3QKS‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​‍‌‍‌⁠‍​⁠​‍‌‍‍⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 140 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wheel system non-traction

    Functional description

    A single caster wheel mounted to the back of the frame allows the machine to pivot easily. The wheel is attached with 4 bolts that are screwed into threaded holes in the frame.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‍‌‌​‍⁠‍​‌‌‍​‍⁠‍‍⁠‌‍‍

    Component locations

    • Caster Wheel
    Photo of the rear swivel caster wheel and its mounting plate under the frame
    Caster wheel
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 141, used with permission. SES ref PF-3MMS-RS66‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‍​⁠‍‌‌​‍⁠‍​‌‌‍​‍⁠‍‍⁠‌‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 141 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Wheel system, traction

    Functional description

    In shortThe SC750 and SC800 use a drive paddle with a potentiometer to go forward and reverse, plus a separate speed limit potentiometer. The SC750 ST and SC800 ST use two palm drive buttons and a reverse button instead. On both, reverse speed is intentionally less than forward, and the drive controller has no specific drive system codes to retrieve.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​‌‍‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠​​‍‌‍​​⁠‌‌​

    A permanent magnet motor transaxle is used to propel the machine in both forward and reverse directions. The controls for forward, reverse and speed are different between the “ST” (SC 750 ST, SC800 ST) and “Non-ST”(SC750, SC800) Models. The SC750 and SC800 models use a drive paddle with an angle sensor (potentiometer) as an input for forward and reverse with a variable speed signal. They also have a separate speed limit potentiometer to control the maximum speed. The SC750 ST and SC800 ST models use a combination of two switches. There are 2 “Palm Drive Buttons” and a Reverse Button. When either palm drive button is pressed, the machine will go forward. If the reverse button is pressed while a palm drive button is pressed the machine will move in reverse. ST models also have a separate speed control potentiometer. It controls the speed of travel. On both models, the speed in reverse is intentionally less than in forward. The Drive Motor Controller varies the amount of voltage it applies to the drive motor to control speed. It reverses the polarity to change direction. The Drive Motor Controller is capable of informing the Main Machine Controller that it sees a problem, but there are no specific drive system codes to retrieve.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​‌‍‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠​​‍‌‍​​⁠‌‌​

    Drive motor circuit description - SC750 ST and SC800 ST models

    Powering up the drive motor controller:

    The controller is connected directly to battery positive (B+) and battery negative (B-). These supply the power that the controller uses to send out to the drive motor. The controller “wakes up” when it receives voltage from the key switch. On machines with an optional on-board battery charger, the voltage first goes through the key switch and then through the interlock circuit in the battery charger when the charger is not plugged into an AC power supply. When the charger is plugged in, the voltage is interrupted by the built in interlock relay and the drive system will not wake up even if the key is turned on.

    Drive motor controller inputs

    To drive forward, the operator presses either palm drive button and rotates the speed control potentiometer to achieve the desired speed. The drive motor controller has internal “voltmeters” that are monitoring 3 inputs.

    1. Palm Switches - To know when to move.
    2. Speed Request - To know how fast to move
    3. Reverse Switch - To know which direction to move

    The palm drive buttons are fed 5 volts from the controller. When either switch closes, the 5 volts goes through the switch and back to the controller where an internal voltmeter “sees” the 5 volts and “recognizes” it as a request to move. (Note: There is an internal “diagnostic voltage” of a little more than 2 volts that will be seen when both switches are open.)

    The speed limit potentiometer is fed 5 volts from the controller on one side of its resistive strip. The voltage goes through the resistive strip and returns to battery negative inside the controller. The “wiper” inside the potentiometer will return a voltage back to the controller as a speed request input. If the wiper is close to the supply side, the voltage will be high (4.6v = Maximum speed request). If it is close to the battery negative return side, the voltage will be low (0.2v = Minimum speed request).

    The reverse switch provides the “directional request input.” Here is how it works. The Drive Motor Controller sends approximately 2.8v through an internal resistor out to the reverse switch. An “internal voltmeter” monitors the voltage. When the reverse switch is open, 2.8v is seen. This is interpreted as a “forward direction” request. When the reverse switch closes, it connects the voltage to battery negative through the Drive Motor Controller. This drops the voltage from 2.5v to nearly 0v. This is interpreted as a “reverse direction” request.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 142, used with permission. SES ref PF-F3NS-RH3O‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​​‌‍‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠​​‍‌‍​​⁠‌‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 142 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Circuit drawing titled Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - ST Models, showing the drive motor, the Drive Motor Controller box with internal voltmeters, the reverse switch, palm switches, speed limit potentiometer and R4 resistor
    Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - ST Models
    Label printed on drawingKind
    Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - ST ModelsDrawing title
    Drive MotorComponent label
    Drive Motor ControllerBox label
    B+ (with pulse symbol), B-, B-, B+Terminal labels beside the two switches inside the controller box
    Internal VoltmetersLabel
    2.8vVoltage label
    5VVoltage label
    B-Terminal labels (two, at the bottom of the controller box)
    Reverse SwitchComponent label
    Palm SwitchesComponent label
    Speed Limit PotentiometerComponent label
    R4 ResistorComponent label
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 143, used with permission. SES ref PF-L3JB-YGDP‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​​​‌‌​​‍‍​​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠‍‌‍​‌‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 143 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Drive motor controller outputs

    The primary job of the Drive Motor Controller is to operate the electric transaxle drive motor. It does this by regulating current flow through the drive motor to control speed, and by changing polarity to control direction. The secondary job is to notify the Main Machine Controller when the machine is moving and which direction it is moving. The Main Machine Controller uses this information to start and stop the solution flow and scrub functions.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌​⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠​‌‌​⁠​​‌‌‌​⁠⁠⁠

    To move the machine forward, the controller connects terminal M2 to battery negative AND connects terminal M1 to battery positive. To regulate the speed, the controller pulses the battery positive voltage out to terminal M1 at a fixed frequency called a “duty cycle”. The greater the percentage of “on” time that the circuit is connected to battery positive, the faster the machine will go.

    To move the machine in reverse, terminal M1 is connected to ground and terminal M2 is pulsed to battery positive voltage. The speed in reverse is intentionally reduced.

    Three oscilloscope traces side by side showing the drive pulses getting wider from slow speed to medium speed to high speed, each with a circled “on” portion and a label
    Drive voltage pulses at slow, medium and high speed
    Trace (left to right)Label printed
    1Slow Speed, Short "on" time
    2Medium Speed, Longer "on" time
    3High Speed, Max "on" time

    Each trace is marked 10 V and 20 us at its lower left.

    The Drive Motor Controller tells the Main Machine Controller when the machine is moving and what direction it is moving. Two circuits are used for this purpose, the FOR/REV and the REV circuit. Here is how the FOR/REV circuit works: The Main Machine Controller sends 24 volts out through an internal resistor to the Drive Motor Controller. The Drive Motor Controller has an internal switch to battery negative (B-). When the machine is not moving, the switch is open. There is an internal voltmeter inside the Main Machine Controller that sees 24 volts on the circuit. When the machine moves in either direction, the switch closes and the voltage drops to 0 volts. This tells the main machine controller that the machine is moving. However, the main machine controller does not know what direction the machine is moving. There is another circuit called the REV circuit that provides direction information. It works similar to the FOR/REV circuit. When the machine is stationary or moving forward, the switch remains open so the main machine controller “sees” 24v. The switch closes when the machine moves in reverse, dropping the voltage to 0v.

    • Stationary Machine - Both Inputs=24v
    • Machine Moving Forward = FOR/REV=0v, REV = 24v
    • Machine Moving in Reverse - FOR/REV=0v, REV = 0v
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 144, used with permission. SES ref PF-2YPZ-JGFK‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​‍‍​​‍‌​⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠​‌‌​⁠​​‌‌‌​⁠⁠⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 144 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Drive motor circuit description - SC750 and SC800 models

    Circuit drawing titled Drive Motor Controller Movement and Direction Outputs showing the Main Machine Controller with 0v and 24v voltmeters joined by a WHT/RED wire and a WHT/ORG wire to the FOR/REV and REV switches in the Drive Motor Controller, in the forward switch states
    Drive Motor Controller movement and direction outputs
    Label printed on drawingKind
    Drive Motor Controller Movement and Direction OutputsDrawing title
    Main Machine ControllerBox label
    0vVoltmeter reading
    24vVoltmeter reading and voltage labels (shown three times)
    Internal VoltmetersLabel
    B-Terminal label
    WHT/REDWire label
    WHT/ORGWire label
    Drive Motor ControllerBox label
    FOR/REVSwitch label
    REVSwitch label
    B-Terminal labels (one beside each switch)
    Switch States for ForwardLabel
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 145, used with permission. SES ref PF-LPNU-7MRB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‌​​⁠⁠‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 145 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Powering up the drive motor controller

    This is the same as the “ST” models. See above section.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‌‌​​⁠⁠‌⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠​‌‍‍⁠

    Drive motor controller inputs

    To drive forward, the operator pushes on a drive paddle which rotates the Speed Control Potentiometer inside the paddle. A separate Speed Limit Potentiometer is rotated to control the maximum speed.

    The drive motor controller has internal “voltmeters” that are monitoring 2 inputs.

    1. Drive Paddle Position - To know when to move and which direction.
    2. Speed Limit - To know what the maximum speed should be.

    The drive paddle Position potentiometer is fed 5 volts from the controller on one side of its resistive strip. The voltage goes through the resistive strip and returns to battery negative inside the controller. The “wiper” inside the potentiometer will return a voltage back to the controller as a direction request input. If the wiper is exactly in the middle, as it should be when drive paddle is in the spring loaded position, the return voltage will be ½ of the supply voltage (2.5v). As the paddle is pushed forward, the wiper moves closer to the supply side, resulting in an increase in voltage. Voltage above 2.5v is interpreted as a forward request. The same input is also used for more or less speed. As the paddle is pushed farther forward, the voltage will increase and it will be interpreted as a request for more speed in the forward direction. (When the drive paddle is pulled back, the voltage will drop below 2.5v. and is interpreted as a reverse request).

    The Speed Limit Potentiometer is fed 5 volts from the controller on one side of its resistive strip. The voltage goes through the resistive strip and returns to battery negative inside the controller. The “wiper” inside the potentiometer will return a voltage back to the controller as a speed request input. If the wiper is close to the supply side, the voltage will be high (4.6v = Maximum speed request). If it is close to the battery negative return side, the voltage will be low (0.2v = Minimum speed request).

    The combination of the drive paddle position potentiometer input and the speed limit potentiometer input allows the operator to hold the paddle all the way forward for normal operation while still being able to adjust the travel speed.

    Drive motor controller outputs

    • This is the same as the ST models. See section above.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 146, used with permission. SES ref PF-LCMN-AMMY‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍​‌‌​​⁠⁠‌⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠​‌‍‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 146 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Circuit drawing titled Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - "Non-ST" Models (SC750, SC800), showing the drive motor, the Drive Motor Controller box with internal voltmeters, and the drive paddle and speed limit potentiometers
    Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - "Non-ST" Models (SC750, SC800)
    Label printed on drawingKind
    Drive Motor Control Circuit, Forward Direction - "Non-ST" Models (SC750, SC800)Drawing title
    Drive MotorComponent label
    Drive Motor ControllerBox label
    B+ (with pulse symbol), B-, B-, B+Terminal labels beside the two switches inside the controller box
    Internal VoltmetersLabel
    5VVoltage label
    B-Terminal label
    WhtWire label
    Drive Paddle PotentiometerComponent label
    Speed Limit PotentiometerComponent label
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 147, used with permission. SES ref PF-OHVM-2I7U‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍​‍⁠‌‌​‍‌‌‌‍​⁠‌‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 147 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Component locations

    • Transaxle (Wheel Drive Motor)
    • Drive Motor Controller
    • Speed Limit Potentiometer – SC750 and SC800
    • Drive Paddle Position Sensor – SC750 and SC800
    • Speed Limit Potentiometer – ST
    • Palm Drive Switches – ST
    • Reverse Switch – ST
    • R4 Resistor – ST
    Photo of the transaxle (wheel drive motor) behind the drive wheel, with an arrow labeled Transaxle
    Transaxle location
    Photo of the electrical compartment with the Drive Motor Controller circled and labeled, and an inset close-up of the controller
    Drive motor controller location
    Photo of the ST handle labeled Reverse Switch, Palm Drive Switches, Speed Limit Potentiometer and R4 Resistor (Inside Handle), with an inset close-up of the R4 resistor wire
    ST handle: reverse switch, palm drive switches, speed limit potentiometer and R4 resistor
    Photo of the SC750 and SC800 handle labeled Drive Paddle Position Sensor (Inside Paddle) and Speed Limit Potentiometer, with an inset close-up of the sensor inside the paddle
    SC750 and SC800 handle: drive paddle position sensor and speed limit potentiometer
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 148, used with permission. SES ref PF-FLDQ-CFIR‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌​​​​‌​‍‍​‌‌​​‌‍‌​‍‌‌​‌⁠​‌⁠‍‌​⁠​​⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 148 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Troubleshooting

    In short The drive motor controller flashes a one-digit Trip Type on a control panel LED: the Detergent LED on non-ST models and the High Solution flow LED on ST models. Find that digit in the trip code table on the next pages. A specific Trip Code needs a PGDT programmer, but you do not need one to troubleshoot the drive system. Call us at 800-440-6723 if you need help.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠​‍‍⁠​‍​‍‍​

    The Drive Motor Controller is a PG Drives Technology controller from the I-Drive family. It performs onboard diagnosis of itself and related circuits. If it sees a problem it sets a “Trip Code”. Trip codes are grouped by “Trip Types”. Either the Trip Type or the Trip Code can be used to focus troubleshooting into a certain area. Trip Codes are more specific than Trip Types.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠​‍‍⁠​‍​‍‍​

    The Drive Motor Controller uses the status wire to inform the Main Machine Controller when it has set a Trip Code and which Trip Type the code belongs to. The main machine controller in turns displays an error code (3 on “Non-ST” models and “1,1” on “ST” models) and it flashes out the Trip TYPE using one of the LEDs on the control panel.

    Reading LED trip type values

    Trip types are represented by a single digit. “Non-ST” models use the Detergent LED to flash out the Trip Type value and “ST” models use the High Solution flow LED. A trip type 7 will flash the LED 7 times, stay off for a brief pause and then repeat the cycle. The main machine controller turns on the LED whenever the voltage on the status line is low and turns it off when the status voltage is high. These photos of a graphing voltmeter monitoring the status line can help you understand what to expect for the LED flash out.

    Graphing voltmeter screen showing the status line pattern for trip type 7: seven pulses, a pause, then the cycle repeats
    Trip Type 7
    Graphing voltmeter screen showing the status line pattern for trip type 1: long off time with brief on time
    Trip Type 1
    Graphing voltmeter screen showing the status line pattern for a throttle input at key-on: steady rate of brief pulses
    Throttle Input at Key-On

    Note: If the Drive Motor Controller sees a “throttle request” at pin 1 when the key is turned on, it will “ignore” the request and tell the Main Machine Controller that there is a problem. The LED used to display the trip type value flashes at a steady rate. It appears to momentarily flash off, then stay on for a bit longer period of time. This should not be confused with a Trip Type 1 where there is more “off time” with a brief “on time”. When the throttle request input is corrected, the LED stops flashing and normal operation is restored without the need to cycle the key off and back on.

    Trip code table

    Information in the following table is provided by PG Drive Technologies. It includes information on codes that may never be seen in the Nilfisk-Advance machine. For example, the SC750/800 model family does not utilize a solenoid brake, so theoretically you should not ever see a trip type 9 (Solenoid Brake Trip), but in the event that you do, the table will provide you with the information you need.

    Photo of the PGDT programmer, a handheld unit labeled SP1 with four buttons and a cable
    PGDT Programmer

    A specific Trip Code can only be obtained by using a PGDT (PG Drives Technology) programmer. This programmer is not required to troubleshoot drive system problems. If you have a drive system problem, check to see if an LED on the control panel is flashing out the “Trip Type” value. Use the table below to find the trip type description. One Trip Type may be related to multiple Trip Codes. You need to refer to the Code Description and Possible Causes for ALL Trip Codes for a given Trip Type.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 149, used with permission. SES ref PF-LI2U-LNUV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‍​‌‍‌‍‌‍⁠​‍‍⁠​‍​‍‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 149 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Trip TypeType DescriptionTrip CodeCode Description and Possible Causes
    1Low Battery Voltage2C00#

    Low Battery Voltage.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌​​‌⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠

    This occurs when the controller detects that the battery voltage has fallen below approximately 13.5V. Check the condition of the batteries, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the batteries, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3

    1Low Battery Voltage2C01#

    Very Low Battery Voltage.

    This occurs when the controller detects a sudden drop in battery voltage. Check the condition of the batteries, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the batteries, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    2Motor Open Circuit3B01#

    Motor Open Circuit.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the motor has become disconnected at start-up or in standby. Check the motor, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the motor, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    3Motor Wiring Trip3D02#

    Motor Shorted To Battery Positive.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the motor wiring has been shorted to Battery Positive. Check the motor, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the motor, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    3Motor Wiring Trip3D03#

    Motor Shorted To Battery Negative.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the motor wiring has been shorted to Battery Negative. Check the motor, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the motor, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    4Not Used
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 150, used with permission. SES ref PF-I564-WOJK‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‌​​‌⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 150 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Trip TypeType DescriptionTrip CodeCode Description and Possible Causes
    5Not Used
    6Inhibit Active0A00#

    Sleep Mode.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌⁠‍‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠‍​​⁠‌‌⁠​⁠​‌​

    This occurs when the controller enters Sleep Mode. Turn the controller off and then on to awake the system. To disable Sleep Mode, program the parameter Sleep Timer to 0 minutes.

    6Inhibit Active1E08*#

    Inhibit 1 Active.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Inhibit 1 input is active, Inhibit 1 Speed has been set to ‘0’ and Inhibit 1 Operation has been set to ‘Latched’. This input is located on pin 6 of the 14-way Tiller Connector. Check the state of the input, Inhibit 1 programming, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the state of the input, programming, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    6Inhibit Active1E09*#

    Inhibit 2 Active.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Inhibit 2 input is active, Inhibit 2 Speed has been set to ‘0’ and Inhibit 2 Operation has been set to ‘Latched’. This input is located on pin 14 of the 14-way Tiller Connector. Check the state of the input, Inhibit 2 programming, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the state of the input, programming, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    7Throttle Trip0815#

    Throttle Trip.

    This occurs when the controller detects an error with one of the throttle references, either high or low. The throttle references are located on pins 2 and 8 of the 14-way Tiller Connector, respectively. Check the throttle potentiometer, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the potentiometer, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 151, used with permission. SES ref PF-BSQS-QCEJ‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‌⁠​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‌⁠‍‍⁠‌‌​‍⁠‍​​⁠‌‌⁠​⁠​‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 151 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Trip TypeType DescriptionTrip CodeCode Description and Possible Causes
    7Throttle Trip0E07#

    Throttle Trip.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍​‍⁠‌‍⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‍‌‌‍‌

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Series Speed Limit Potentiometer Wiper is shorted to one of the throttle references, either high or low. The Series Speed Limit Potentiometer Wiper input is located on pin 1 of the 14-way Tiller Connector. The trip is only applicable if an ISO-test resistor is fitted and programmed correctly. Check the throttle potentiometer, programming, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the potentiometer, programming, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    7Throttle Trip2F01*#

    Throttle Displaced At Start-Up.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Throttle Potentiometer has been displaced at start-up and the parameter Throttle Operated At Power-Up has been set to ‘Trip’. Check that the operator is not deflecting the throttle at power-up, the throttle potentiometer, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the operator use, potentiometer, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    7Throttle Trip7901#

    Belly Button Active At Start-Up.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Belly Button Switch has been operated at power-up. The Belly Button Input is located on pin 9 of the 14-way Tiller Connector. Check the Belly Button Switch, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the switch, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    8Possible Controller Fault5300#

    Programmable Setting Changed.

    This occurs whenever the value of a parameter is altered using a programmer. Turn the controller off and then on to reset the trip.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 152, used with permission. SES ref PF-DPSK-R5WH‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​‍‍​‍​‍​‍⁠‌‍⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‍‌‌‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 152 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Trip TypeType DescriptionTrip CodeCode Description and Possible Causes
    8Possible Controller FaultAll Other Possible Controller Fault Codes

    This occurs when the controller suspects an internal problem. Check the batteries, motor, connectors and wiring to the i-Drive.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​‌‍‌‍‍‌​‌​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌​

    If the trip is still present after these checks have been conducted, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    9Solenoid Brake Trip1500#

    Short Circuit In Solenoid Brake.

    This occurs when the controller detects a short circuit in the solenoid brake. Check the solenoid brake, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the brake, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    9Solenoid Brake Trip1502#

    Open Circuit In Solenoid Brake.

    This occurs when the controller detects an open circuit in the solenoid brake at start-up or in standby. Check the solenoid brake, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the brake, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    10High Battery Voltage1600#

    High Battery Voltage.

    This occurs when the controller detects that the battery voltage has exceeded approximately 35V on 24V i-Drives and approximately 45V on 36V i-Drives. Check the condition of the batteries, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the batteries, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    10High Battery Voltage1601#

    Very High Battery Voltage. Refer to Section 2.10.2

    This occurs when the controller detects that the battery voltage has exceeded approximately 45V on 24V i-Drives and approximately 49.5V on 36V i-Drives. Check the condition of the batteries, connectors and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the batteries, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 153, used with permission. SES ref PF-6WQQ-OWX4‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍‌​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍​‌‍‌‍‍‌​‌​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌​
    Form Number 56043150Page 153 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    Trip TypeType DescriptionTrip CodeCode Description and Possible Causes
    Undefined300#

    Parallel Speed Pot. Wiper Error‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​⁠‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍​

    This occurs when the controller detects that the Parallel Speed Limit Potentiometer Wiper is open circuit or has been shorted to one of the throttle references. The Parallel Speed Limit Potentiometer Wiper input is located on pin 9 of the 14-way Tiller Connector. If this error occurs, the controller will allow drive to continue but at the minimum programmed speed. Check the parallel speed potentiometer, connections and relevant wiring to the i-Drive.

    If the trip is still present after the potentiometer, connectors and wiring have been checked, the controller may be defective. Refer to Section 3.

    Undefined4401#

    Record Of Possible Control Fault.

    ‘4401’ is not actually a trip code but rather a historical record of the number of times the i-Drive has tripped with a suspected controller fault. Each time the i-Drive trips with an error not shown in the table above, it records one instance of the code ‘4401’ in the controller’s System Log. The actual controller trip code is also recorded in the i-Drive’s Control Log. The number of ‘4401’ trips shown in the System Log should therefore equal the cumulative number of trip occurrences shown in the Control Log. More information on the i-Drive’s diagnostic logs can be found in Chapter 3, Section 12. Check the batteries, motor, connectors and wiring to the i-Drive.

    Please contact PGDT for further advice before returning a controller based solely on the presence of historical ‘4401’ trips in the System Log.

    * Dependant on programming

    Trip Types 4 and 5 not used for i-Drive

    Section 3 Servicing of defective units

    There are no serviceable parts within the controller. Opening or making any unauthorized adjustments or modifications to the controller or its components will invalidate any warranty and may result in hazards to the operator and is strictly forbidden.

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 154, used with permission. SES ref PF-6SXJ-POMV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​‍‍​‍‌‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​⁠‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍​
    Form Number 56043150Page 154 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Does not propel forward or reverse with no trip type set

    In the event the machine will not propel and there are no Trip Codes or Trip Types to narrow down the problem area, systematically check the Drive Motor Controller power supplies, inputs and outputs. Use the Service Test Mode to speed your diagnosis. Check to see if the Drive Motor Controller is sending signals to the Main Machine Controller that indicate it is trying to move the machine. If it is, that confirms that the input requests to the Drive Motor Controller are good and that it is trying to respond to them. Next, check to see if there is voltage across the motor terminals. If the voltage is above 6 volts and the motor is not turning, the motor is the problem (Check the carbon brushes). If there is no voltage to the motor, the controller or wiring has failed.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌‍‍​‍​​⁠​​⁠‌‌​⁠‌⁠‌​‌

    Possible causes

    • Battery voltage too low
    • Controller not receiving input requests for travel
    • Drive motor
    • Drive motor controller
    • Wiring
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 155, used with permission. SES ref PF-OQVS-KIYP‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌‍⁠​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌‍‍​‍​​⁠​​⁠‌‌​⁠‌⁠‌​‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 155 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Removal and installation

    In short Most handle jobs (ST reverse switch, non-ST speed limit potentiometer, paddle position sensor on page 159) begin by removing the upper handle bolts, loosening the lower bolts and rotating the handle down; the ST speed limit potentiometer and ST palm switches have a step first (see each procedure). Before disconnecting any wires, record the wire colors and their positions so they go back correctly.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‌⁠​⁠​‌⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍⁠‌‍‌​​‍‍

    Speed limit potentiometer – ST models

    1. Loosen set screw and remove knob.
    2. Remove potentiometer mounting nut and washer.
    3. Remove upper handle bolts.
    4. Loosen lower handle bolts and rotate handle down.
    5. Disconnect handle electrical connector.
    6. Remove the access plate.
    7. Disconnect 3 electrical connectors. Make sure you carefully record the wire colors and their positions so that you will be able to reconnect them correctly.
    8. Remove potentiometer.
    9. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Photo of the ST handle turned down, with an arrow labeled Remove Access Plate pointing to the plate and a screwdriver at its lower screw
    Removing the access plate (ST handle)

    Speed limit potentiometer – Non-ST models

    1. Remove upper handle bolts.
    2. Loosen lower handle bolts and rotate handle down.
    3. From the back side of the paddle, remove the 4 screws securing the front cover. Partially remove the front cover.
    4. Disconnect the wiring from the speed limit potentiometer. Make sure you carefully record the wire colors and their positions so that you will be able to reconnect them correctly.
    5. Remove front cover.
    6. Remove the potentiometer knob and mounting nut.
    7. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Photo of the back of the paddle on a bench with the four front cover screws circled and a label reading Remove 4 Screws
    Removing the 4 front cover screws
    Photo inside the paddle front cover showing the speed limit potentiometer with three red wire terminals attached
    Speed limit potentiometer inside the front cover
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 156, used with permission. SES ref PF-5GSU-WAUT‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​‌​‌‌⁠​⁠​‌⁠‌‍⁠‍‍‍⁠‌‍‌​​‍‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 156 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Palm button switches – ST models

    1. Remove two switch mounting screws.
    2. Remove upper handle bolts.
    3. Loosen lower handle bolts and rotate handle down.
    4. Remove access plate.
    5. Disconnect wiring. Make sure you carefully record the wire colors and their positions so that you will be able to reconnect them correctly.
    6. Remove switch and wiring.
      1. Tip – To make it easier to install a new switch, use a spare piece of wire attached to the wires of the old switch when you pull it out. Attach the new switch wires to the spare wire to pull the wiring back through the handle.
    7. Reassemble in reverse order.

    Reverse switch – ST models

    1. Remove upper handle bolts.
    2. Loosen lower handle bolts and rotate handle down.
    3. Remove access plate.
    4. From inside the handle area, push the reverse switch out of the handle.
    5. Disconnect wiring and remove. Make sure you carefully record the wire colors and their positions so that you will be able to reconnect them correctly.
    6. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Photo of the ST handle turned down with the access plate removed, showing the wiring and reverse switch inside the opening
    Reverse switch area with the access plate removed
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 157, used with permission. SES ref PF-XH7K-TVB2‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠‌​​​‌​‍‍​​‌‌⁠​​‍⁠‍‌‍‍⁠‍⁠‌‍​‍​‍‍‌⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 157 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Handle wiring connections – ST models

    ComponentWire color – Component sideWire color – Harness sideTo Main Machine Controller (A1) pin
    Reverse SwitchBlackGRAJ4-13
    Reverse SwitchBlackPNKJ4-12
    Speed Pot. (Low Ref.)WhiteBLK, BLK (R4)J4-8
    Speed Pot. (Wiper)BrownBRNJ4-9
    Speed Pot. (Hi)BlackWHT, WHTJ4-2
    Right Traction SwitchBlackBLU, BLUJ4-1
    Right Traction SwitchBlackWHT, WHTJ4-2
    Left Traction SwitchBlackBLUJ4-1
    Left Traction SwitchBlackWHT, BLK (R4)J4-2
    Photo of the ST handle wiring harness with each wire end labeled: Speed Pot (Wiper) BRN, Reverse Switch GRA, Reverse Switch PNK, Speed Pot (Hi) WHT WHT, Right Traction Switch WHT WHT, Left Traction Switch WHT BLK (R4), Speed Pot (Low Ref.) BLK BLK (R4), R4, Right Traction Switch BLU BLU, Left Traction Switch BLU
    Handle wiring harness labels

    Labels printed on the photo:‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‌​‌⁠⁠⁠‍‌⁠​​⁠‌‌

    LabelWire color shown
    Handle Wiring Harness
    Speed Pot (Wiper)BRN
    Right Traction SwitchBLU, BLU
    Left Traction SwitchBLU
    Reverse SwitchGRA
    Reverse SwitchPNK
    Speed Pot. (Low Ref.)BLK, BLK (R4)
    R4
    Speed Pot (Hi)WHT, WHT
    Right Traction SwitchWHT, WHT
    Left Traction SwitchWHT, BLK (R4)
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 158, used with permission. SES ref PF-MGLK-UFNB‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠‌⁠​‍⁠⁠​​‌​‌⁠⁠⁠‍‌⁠​​⁠‌‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 158 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Paddle position sensor – Non-ST models – SC750, SC800

    Photos are shown working on a bench top but this can be done on the machine.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌‌​​​⁠​​⁠​

    1. Remove top two handle mounting bolts.
    2. Loosen the bottom two handle mounting bolts and rotate handle down.
    3. From the back side of the paddle, remove the 4 screws securing the front cover. Remove the front cover.
    Photo of the back of the paddle on a bench with the four front cover screws circled and a label reading Remove 4 Screws
    Removing the 4 front cover screws
    1. Disconnect wiring from the potentiometer. Make sure you carefully record the wire colors and their positions so that you will be able to reconnect them correctly.
    Photo inside the paddle showing the potentiometer and its wiring
    Potentiometer wiring inside the paddle
    1. Remove the cam controller.
    Photo inside the paddle with labels Remove Cam Controller, Set Screw and Potentiometer Fork
    Cam controller, set screw and potentiometer fork
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 159, used with permission. SES ref PF-6A6J-VPKT‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‌‍⁠‍⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌‌​​​⁠​​⁠​
    Form Number 56043150Page 159 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Loosen set screw and remove the potentiometer fork.
    2. Remove the potentiometer mounting nut and washer.
    3. Install the potentiometer.
    4. Loosely install the potentiometer fork.
    Photo of a hand loosely installing the potentiometer fork onto the potentiometer shaft
    Loosely installing the potentiometer fork
    1. Install the cam controller inserting the pin end into the fork.
    2. Adjust the potentiometer position.
      1. Measure the resistance between the two outer terminals and write the value down.
    Photo of meter leads on the two outer terminals of the potentiometer
    Meter leads on the two outer terminals
    Photo of a meter display reading 05.02 kilohms
    Meter reading 05.02 kΩ
    1. Hook up your ohmmeter leads between the center terminal and one of the outer terminals. Using a small slotted screwdriver in the end of the potentiometer shaft, rotate the shaft until the value on the ohmmeter is exactly ½ of the value written down in step a.
    Photo of meter leads on the center terminal and one outer terminal of the potentiometer
    Meter leads on the center and an outer terminal
    Photo of a meter display reading 2.573 kilohms
    Meter reading 2.573 kΩ
    1. Tighten the fork set screw.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 160, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZSF2-GWIV‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍​​​​​‌​‍‍​​​⁠‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​​‌‌⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠‍
    Form Number 56043150Page 160 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Reconnect the wiring.
    2. Reinstall the paddle cover. (Reconnect the speed limit potentiometer wiring.)
    3. Rotate the handle assembly back up into position and loosely install the top mounting bolts.
    4. Tighten all 4 handle mounting bolts.

    Paddle centering springs – Non-ST models – SC750, SC800

    In the event that the paddle centering springs and hardware need to be replaced, these photos will help you assemble it correctly.‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌​‍​‍⁠‌​⁠‍‌

    1. Carefully remove the attaching screw. Pieces will fly apart if you do not retain the springs.
    Photo of a hand holding the paddle centering spring stack beside the potentiometer after the screw is removed
    Paddle centering spring stack
    1. When reassembling, install the “lower stack” first. The shoulder of the nylon washers goes toward the spring. Carefully position the pieces so that they stay in place.
    Photo of a hand holding the lower stack: screw, washer, spring and nylon washer
    Lower stack parts
    Photo of the lower and upper spring stacks installed on the paddle post
    Lower and upper stacks installed
    1. Next, prepare the upper stack for assembly as shown. Install it and tighten the screw. (Do not over-tighten the screw or it will strip out the tower).
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 161, used with permission. SES ref PF-AKEW-4Y7Z‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍​‌​​​‌​‍‍​⁠⁠​‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌​‍​‍⁠‌​⁠‍‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 161 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL

    Drive wheel

    1. Loosen the three nuts securing the wheel to the hub flange.
      Photo of the drive wheel hub with the three wheel-to-hub mounting nuts circled and labeled Wheel To Hub Mounting Nuts
      Wheel to hub mounting nuts
      1. There are 6 nuts on the outer rim of the wheel. Three are for holding the two rim halves together. These have standard nuts with “star” lock washers. The other three are for securing the wheel to the hub. These have Nylock style nuts.
    1. Raise the wheel off the ground with a jack and remove the 3 mounting nuts.
    2. Remove the wheel.
    3. Reassemble in reverse order.

    Transaxle

    1. Empty solution and recovery tanks.
    2. Remove the squeegee tool.
    3. Remove the batteries.
    4. Remove one drive wheel and remove the transaxle mounting bolts behind it.
    Photo of the transaxle hub with three transaxle mounting bolts circled and labeled Transaxle Mounting Bolts
    Transaxle mounting bolts
    1. With the help of an assistant, lay the machine on its side. Lay it on the side that has the wheel off and be sure to protect the side from damage.
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 162, used with permission. SES ref PF-VMHM-BLS2‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍​‍​​​‌​‍‍​⁠‍⁠‌‌⁠‍‌‍⁠‌​‌⁠​⁠‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 162 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Remove the other drive wheel and the transaxle mounting bolts behind it.
    2. Disconnect the transaxle motor electrical connector.
    3. Make a note of how the transaxle is oriented in the frame before removing it so that it is reassembled correctly.
    4. Remove the transaxle by sliding it out of the frame slots.
    Photo of the machine laid on its side with the transaxle visible and an arrow labeled Slot pointing to the frame slot
    Transaxle frame slot
    1. Reassemble in reverse order.
    Parts for this job

    Transaxle drive motor carbon brushes

    1. Remove transaxle.
    2. Remove round black plastic brush cap.
    3. Remove carbon brush and spring.
    Photo of a hand pulling a carbon brush and spring out of the transaxle motor, labeled Remove Brush and Spring
    Removing the brush and spring
    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 163, used with permission. SES ref PF-33ZV-HN3Q‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍​⁠​​​‌​‍‍​‍‍‌‍‍‌​‌‌‍‍‍‍​‌​​⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠‌
    Form Number 56043150Page 163 of 164
    SERVICE MANUAL
    1. Install brush and spring. Install and tighten cap with a screwdriver.
    Photo of a carbon brush and spring being installed in the motor, labeled Install Brush and Spring
    Installing the brush and spring
    Photo of a hand tightening the round black brush cap, labeled Reinstall Brush Cap
    Reinstalling the brush cap
    1. Repeat steps for all 4 carbon brushes.

    Specifications

    Drive WheelsDiameter: 10 in (25.4 cm)
    Width: 3 in (7.62 cm)
    Type/Material: Polyurethane Foam – molded
    Drive Motor.4 HP (298 watts)
    Max. Transport SpeedFwd: 3.57 mph (5.75 km/h)
    Rev: 2.71 mph (4.36 km/h)

    Drive motor amp draw measurements

    • No load (one wheel jacked up), jumped directly to battery – Approximately 1.8 amps
    • Traversing on level floor with empty tanks driven by Drive Motor Controller at highest speed – Approximately 4-5 amps (Note: Amp draw is higher when getting up to speed – approximately 10 – 12 amps.)

    Potentiometers

    Speed Limit Potentiometer – 100K ohms‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍‌‍‌‌‌‍​‌⁠‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠

    Paddle Position Potentiometer – 5K ohms

    Source: Advance SC750 / SC800 Service Manual 56043150 Rev. 11/10 Revised 12/16, page 164, used with permission. SES ref PF-RXZ5-K3P2‌‌​⁠‌​‍​‍‌‍‍‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​​​​‍‍‌​​​​‌​‍‍​​⁠‍‌‍‌‌‌‍​‌⁠‍‌‌‌‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠
    Form Number 56043150Page 164 of 164

    Advance is a trademark of Nilfisk, Inc. Southeastern Equipment & Supply is an independent dealer.